1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
3 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007
4 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 This file is part of GCC.
8 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
9 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
10 Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
13 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
14 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
15 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
18 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19 along with GCC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
20 Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
25 #include "coretypes.h"
33 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
36 #include "insn-config.h"
37 #include "insn-attr.h"
38 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
45 #include "typeclass.h"
48 #include "langhooks.h"
51 #include "tree-iterator.h"
52 #include "tree-pass.h"
53 #include "tree-flow.h"
58 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
59 from first to last or from last to first.
61 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
62 only if we have push insns. */
66 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
67 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
68 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */
74 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
75 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
76 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
78 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
83 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
84 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
85 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
86 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
87 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
88 the same indirect address eventually. */
91 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
102 int explicit_inc_from;
103 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
104 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
108 /* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to
111 struct store_by_pieces
117 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
118 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
119 rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode);
124 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
127 static void move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode,
128 struct move_by_pieces *);
129 static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void);
130 static bool emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned, unsigned, HOST_WIDE_INT);
131 static tree emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int);
132 static void emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned);
133 static rtx clear_by_pieces_1 (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode);
134 static void clear_by_pieces (rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned int);
135 static void store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces *, unsigned int);
136 static void store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode,
137 struct store_by_pieces *);
138 static tree clear_storage_libcall_fn (int);
139 static rtx compress_float_constant (rtx, rtx);
140 static rtx get_subtarget (rtx);
141 static void store_constructor_field (rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
142 HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode,
143 tree, tree, int, int);
144 static void store_constructor (tree, rtx, int, HOST_WIDE_INT);
145 static rtx store_field (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode,
146 tree, tree, int, bool);
148 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT highest_pow2_factor_for_target (tree, tree);
150 static int is_aligning_offset (tree, tree);
151 static void expand_operands (tree, tree, rtx, rtx*, rtx*,
152 enum expand_modifier);
153 static rtx reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx, rtx, tree);
154 static rtx do_store_flag (tree, rtx, enum machine_mode, int);
156 static void emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode, rtx, tree);
158 static void do_tablejump (rtx, enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx, rtx);
159 static rtx const_vector_from_tree (tree);
160 static void write_complex_part (rtx, rtx, bool);
162 /* Record for each mode whether we can move a register directly to or
163 from an object of that mode in memory. If we can't, we won't try
164 to use that mode directly when accessing a field of that mode. */
166 static char direct_load[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
167 static char direct_store[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
169 /* Record for each mode whether we can float-extend from memory. */
171 static bool float_extend_from_mem[NUM_MACHINE_MODES][NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
173 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
174 to perform a structure copy. */
175 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
176 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
177 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
178 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO)
181 /* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be
182 called to clear storage. */
183 #ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P
184 #define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
185 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
186 < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO)
189 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
190 called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero, or
191 to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */
192 #ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P
193 #define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
194 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
195 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO)
198 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block moves. */
199 enum insn_code movmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
201 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block sets. */
202 enum insn_code setmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
204 /* These arrays record the insn_code of three different kinds of insns
205 to perform block compares. */
206 enum insn_code cmpstr_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
207 enum insn_code cmpstrn_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
208 enum insn_code cmpmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
210 /* Synchronization primitives. */
211 enum insn_code sync_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
212 enum insn_code sync_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
213 enum insn_code sync_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
214 enum insn_code sync_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
215 enum insn_code sync_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
216 enum insn_code sync_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
217 enum insn_code sync_old_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
218 enum insn_code sync_old_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
219 enum insn_code sync_old_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
220 enum insn_code sync_old_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
221 enum insn_code sync_old_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
222 enum insn_code sync_old_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
223 enum insn_code sync_new_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
224 enum insn_code sync_new_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
225 enum insn_code sync_new_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
226 enum insn_code sync_new_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
227 enum insn_code sync_new_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
228 enum insn_code sync_new_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
229 enum insn_code sync_compare_and_swap[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
230 enum insn_code sync_compare_and_swap_cc[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
231 enum insn_code sync_lock_test_and_set[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
232 enum insn_code sync_lock_release[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
234 /* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is nonzero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */
236 #ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
237 #define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS(MODE, ALIGN) STRICT_ALIGNMENT
240 /* This is run once per compilation to set up which modes can be used
241 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. */
244 init_expr_once (void)
247 enum machine_mode mode;
252 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
253 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
254 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
255 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
256 mem1 = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, frame_pointer_rtx);
258 /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid
259 useless RTL allocations. */
260 reg = gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode, -1);
262 insn = rtx_alloc (INSN);
263 pat = gen_rtx_SET (0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
264 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
266 for (mode = VOIDmode; (int) mode < NUM_MACHINE_MODES;
267 mode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) mode + 1))
271 direct_load[(int) mode] = direct_store[(int) mode] = 0;
272 PUT_MODE (mem, mode);
273 PUT_MODE (mem1, mode);
274 PUT_MODE (reg, mode);
276 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
277 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
279 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode)
280 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
281 && (direct_load[(int) mode] == 0 || direct_store[(int) mode] == 0);
284 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode))
287 SET_REGNO (reg, regno);
290 SET_DEST (pat) = reg;
291 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
292 direct_load[(int) mode] = 1;
294 SET_SRC (pat) = mem1;
295 SET_DEST (pat) = reg;
296 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
297 direct_load[(int) mode] = 1;
300 SET_DEST (pat) = mem;
301 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
302 direct_store[(int) mode] = 1;
305 SET_DEST (pat) = mem1;
306 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
307 direct_store[(int) mode] = 1;
311 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode, 10000));
313 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); mode != VOIDmode;
314 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
316 enum machine_mode srcmode;
317 for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); srcmode != mode;
318 srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode))
322 ic = can_extend_p (mode, srcmode, 0);
323 if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing)
326 PUT_MODE (mem, srcmode);
328 if ((*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (mem, srcmode))
329 float_extend_from_mem[mode][srcmode] = true;
334 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
339 cfun->expr = ggc_alloc_cleared (sizeof (struct expr_status));
342 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
343 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating.
344 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
345 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
348 convert_move (rtx to, rtx from, int unsignedp)
350 enum machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to);
351 enum machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
352 int to_real = SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode);
353 int from_real = SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode);
357 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
358 enum rtx_code equiv_code = (unsignedp < 0 ? UNKNOWN
359 : (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND));
362 gcc_assert (to_real == from_real);
363 gcc_assert (to_mode != BLKmode);
364 gcc_assert (from_mode != BLKmode);
366 /* If the source and destination are already the same, then there's
371 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
372 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
375 if (GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from)
376 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from)))
377 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode))
378 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from) == unsignedp)
379 from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, from), from_mode = to_mode;
381 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (to) != SUBREG || !SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to));
383 if (to_mode == from_mode
384 || (from_mode == VOIDmode && CONSTANT_P (from)))
386 emit_move_insn (to, from);
390 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode))
392 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode));
394 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode))
395 from = simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode, from, GET_MODE (from), 0);
397 to = simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode, to, GET_MODE (to), 0);
399 emit_move_insn (to, from);
403 if (GET_CODE (to) == CONCAT && GET_CODE (from) == CONCAT)
405 convert_move (XEXP (to, 0), XEXP (from, 0), unsignedp);
406 convert_move (XEXP (to, 1), XEXP (from, 1), unsignedp);
415 gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode)
416 != GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))
417 || (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode)
418 != DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode)));
420 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))
421 /* Conversion between decimal float and binary float, same size. */
422 tab = DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode) ? trunc_optab : sext_optab;
423 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))
428 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
430 code = tab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].insn_code;
431 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
433 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from,
434 tab == sext_optab ? FLOAT_EXTEND : FLOAT_TRUNCATE);
438 /* Otherwise use a libcall. */
439 libcall = tab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].libfunc;
441 /* Is this conversion implemented yet? */
442 gcc_assert (libcall);
445 value = emit_library_call_value (libcall, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, to_mode,
447 insns = get_insns ();
449 emit_libcall_block (insns, to, value,
450 tab == trunc_optab ? gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode,
452 : gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (to_mode, from));
456 /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */
457 /* Targets are expected to provide conversion insns between PxImode and
458 xImode for all MODE_PARTIAL_INT modes they use, but no others. */
459 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
461 enum machine_mode full_mode
462 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode), MODE_INT);
464 gcc_assert (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][full_mode].insn_code
465 != CODE_FOR_nothing);
467 if (full_mode != from_mode)
468 from = convert_to_mode (full_mode, from, unsignedp);
469 emit_unop_insn (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][full_mode].insn_code,
473 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
476 enum machine_mode full_mode
477 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode), MODE_INT);
479 gcc_assert (sext_optab->handlers[full_mode][from_mode].insn_code
480 != CODE_FOR_nothing);
482 if (to_mode == full_mode)
484 emit_unop_insn (sext_optab->handlers[full_mode][from_mode].insn_code,
489 new_from = gen_reg_rtx (full_mode);
490 emit_unop_insn (sext_optab->handlers[full_mode][from_mode].insn_code,
491 new_from, from, UNKNOWN);
493 /* else proceed to integer conversions below. */
494 from_mode = full_mode;
498 /* Now both modes are integers. */
500 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
501 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
502 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
509 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode;
510 int nwords = CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode), UNITS_PER_WORD);
512 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
513 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
516 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
517 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
518 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
519 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
520 if (optimize > 0 && GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG)
521 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
522 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
525 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
526 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD
527 && ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, word_mode, unsignedp))
528 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
532 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from))
533 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
534 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, to));
536 convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), from, unsignedp);
537 emit_unop_insn (code, to,
538 gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), equiv_code);
542 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
545 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure
546 that the source does not overlap the target. */
548 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from))
549 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
551 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
552 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
553 lowpart_mode = word_mode;
555 lowpart_mode = from_mode;
557 lowfrom = convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode, from, unsignedp);
559 lowpart = gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode, to);
560 emit_move_insn (lowpart, lowfrom);
562 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
564 fill_value = const0_rtx;
569 && insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_slt].operand[0].mode == word_mode
570 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
572 emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX,
574 fill_value = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
575 emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value));
581 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, lowpart_mode, lowfrom,
582 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode) - 1),
584 fill_value = convert_to_mode (word_mode, fill_value, 1);
588 /* Fill the remaining words. */
589 for (i = GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; i < nwords; i++)
591 int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i);
592 rtx subword = operand_subword (to, index, 1, to_mode);
594 gcc_assert (subword);
596 if (fill_value != subword)
597 emit_move_insn (subword, fill_value);
600 insns = get_insns ();
603 emit_no_conflict_block (insns, to, from, NULL_RTX,
604 gen_rtx_fmt_e (equiv_code, to_mode, copy_rtx (from)));
608 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
609 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD
610 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD)
613 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
614 && direct_load[(int) to_mode]
615 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
617 || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
618 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
619 convert_move (to, gen_lowpart (word_mode, from), 0);
623 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
624 no more than a word long. */
626 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
627 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)
628 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
629 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)))
632 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
633 && direct_load[(int) to_mode]
634 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
636 || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
637 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
638 if (REG_P (from) && REGNO (from) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
639 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from), to_mode))
640 from = copy_to_reg (from);
641 emit_move_insn (to, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
645 /* Handle extension. */
646 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
648 /* Convert directly if that works. */
649 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
652 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
657 enum machine_mode intermediate;
661 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
662 for (intermediate = from_mode; intermediate != VOIDmode;
663 intermediate = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate))
664 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode, intermediate, unsignedp)
666 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate)
667 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
668 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (intermediate))))
669 && (can_extend_p (intermediate, from_mode, unsignedp)
670 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
672 convert_move (to, convert_to_mode (intermediate, from,
673 unsignedp), unsignedp);
677 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
678 Generate what we need with shifts. */
679 shift_amount = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE,
680 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
681 - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode));
682 from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, force_reg (from_mode, from));
683 tmp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, from, shift_amount,
685 tmp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, tmp, shift_amount,
688 emit_move_insn (to, tmp);
693 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
694 if (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
696 emit_unop_insn (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].insn_code,
701 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
702 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
703 and for which there was no special instruction.
705 ??? Code above formerly short-circuited this, for most integer
706 mode pairs, with a force_reg in from_mode followed by a recursive
707 call to this routine. Appears always to have been wrong. */
708 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
710 rtx temp = force_reg (to_mode, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
711 emit_move_insn (to, temp);
715 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
719 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
720 from converting X to mode MODE.
721 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
722 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
723 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
724 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. */
727 convert_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, int unsignedp)
729 return convert_modes (mode, VOIDmode, x, unsignedp);
732 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
733 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
734 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
735 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
737 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
738 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
740 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode. */
743 convert_modes (enum machine_mode mode, enum machine_mode oldmode, rtx x, int unsignedp)
747 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
748 the required extension, strip it. */
750 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x)
751 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)
752 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x) == unsignedp)
753 x = gen_lowpart (mode, x);
755 if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode)
756 oldmode = GET_MODE (x);
761 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
762 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
763 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
764 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
765 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
767 if (unsignedp && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
768 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
769 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (x) < 0)
771 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x);
773 if (oldmode != VOIDmode
774 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode))
776 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode);
778 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
779 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
782 return immed_double_const (val, (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, mode);
785 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
786 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
787 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
788 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
790 if ((GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT
791 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
792 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
793 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode) == MODE_INT
794 && (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
795 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode)
796 && ((MEM_P (x) && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
797 && direct_load[(int) mode])
799 && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x)
800 || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x), mode))
801 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode),
802 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)))))))))
804 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
805 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
806 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
807 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && oldmode != VOIDmode
808 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode))
810 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x);
811 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode);
813 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
814 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
815 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
817 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1))))
818 val |= (HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width;
820 return gen_int_mode (val, mode);
823 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
826 /* Converting from integer constant into mode is always equivalent to an
828 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode) && GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
830 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode));
831 return simplify_gen_subreg (mode, x, oldmode, 0);
834 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
835 convert_move (temp, x, unsignedp);
839 /* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can
840 store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is
841 MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent
842 for an immediate constant. */
844 #define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT))
846 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes can be moved by using several move
847 instructions. Return nonzero if a call to move_by_pieces should
851 can_move_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
852 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
854 return MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align);
857 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to
858 block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
860 If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is
861 used to push FROM to the stack.
863 ALIGN is maximum stack alignment we can assume.
865 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
866 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
870 move_by_pieces (rtx to, rtx from, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
871 unsigned int align, int endp)
873 struct move_by_pieces data;
874 rtx to_addr, from_addr = XEXP (from, 0);
875 unsigned int max_size = MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
876 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
877 enum insn_code icode;
879 align = MIN (to ? MEM_ALIGN (to) : align, MEM_ALIGN (from));
882 data.from_addr = from_addr;
885 to_addr = XEXP (to, 0);
888 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
889 || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
891 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
898 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
904 data.to_addr = to_addr;
907 = (GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_DEC
908 || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_INC
909 || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_DEC);
911 data.explicit_inc_from = 0;
912 data.explicit_inc_to = 0;
913 if (data.reverse) data.offset = len;
916 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
917 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
918 and use post-increment if available. */
919 if (!(data.autinc_from && data.autinc_to)
920 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len, align, max_size) > 2)
922 /* Find the mode of the largest move... */
923 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
924 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
925 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
928 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_from)
930 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr, len));
931 data.autinc_from = 1;
932 data.explicit_inc_from = -1;
934 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.autinc_from)
936 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
937 data.autinc_from = 1;
938 data.explicit_inc_from = 1;
940 if (!data.autinc_from && CONSTANT_P (from_addr))
941 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
942 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
944 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, len));
946 data.explicit_inc_to = -1;
948 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
950 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
952 data.explicit_inc_to = 1;
954 if (!data.autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
955 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
958 tmode = mode_for_size (MOVE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
959 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
960 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
963 enum machine_mode xmode;
965 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
967 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
968 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > MOVE_MAX_PIECES
969 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
972 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
975 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
976 successively smaller modes. */
980 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
981 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
982 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
985 if (mode == VOIDmode)
988 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
989 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
990 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, &data);
992 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
995 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
996 gcc_assert (!data.len);
1002 gcc_assert (!data.reverse);
1007 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data.explicit_inc_to > 0)
1008 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data.to_addr, constm1_rtx));
1010 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (data.to_addr,
1013 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data.to, QImode, data.to_addr,
1020 to1 = adjust_address (data.to, QImode, data.offset);
1028 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1029 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1031 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1032 move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l, unsigned int align,
1033 unsigned int max_size)
1035 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns = 0;
1036 enum machine_mode tmode;
1038 tmode = mode_for_size (MOVE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
1039 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
1040 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
1043 enum machine_mode tmode, xmode;
1045 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
1047 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1048 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > MOVE_MAX_PIECES
1049 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
1052 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
1055 while (max_size > 1)
1057 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
1058 enum insn_code icode;
1060 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
1061 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1062 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
1065 if (mode == VOIDmode)
1068 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
1069 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
1070 n_insns += l / GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), l %= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1072 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1079 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1080 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1081 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1084 move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*genfun) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode mode,
1085 struct move_by_pieces *data)
1087 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1088 rtx to1 = NULL_RTX, from1;
1090 while (data->len >= size)
1093 data->offset -= size;
1097 if (data->autinc_to)
1098 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr,
1101 to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset);
1104 if (data->autinc_from)
1105 from1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->from, mode, data->from_addr,
1108 from1 = adjust_address (data->from, mode, data->offset);
1110 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
1111 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
1112 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size)));
1113 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from < 0)
1114 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr,
1115 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size)));
1118 emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, from1));
1121 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
1122 emit_single_push_insn (mode, from1, NULL);
1128 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
1129 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
1130 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from > 0)
1131 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
1133 if (! data->reverse)
1134 data->offset += size;
1140 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with
1141 string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions,
1142 or with a library call.
1144 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode.
1145 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1146 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have.
1147 METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used.
1149 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1153 emit_block_move_hints (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method,
1154 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
1162 case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL:
1163 case BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL:
1164 may_use_call = true;
1167 case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM:
1168 may_use_call = block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ();
1170 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
1171 to force it to pop the arguments right away. */
1175 case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL:
1176 may_use_call = false;
1183 align = MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x), MEM_ALIGN (y));
1185 gcc_assert (MEM_P (x));
1186 gcc_assert (MEM_P (y));
1189 /* Make sure we've got BLKmode addresses; store_one_arg can decide that
1190 block copy is more efficient for other large modes, e.g. DCmode. */
1191 x = adjust_address (x, BLKmode, 0);
1192 y = adjust_address (y, BLKmode, 0);
1194 /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this
1195 can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */
1196 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
1198 if (INTVAL (size) == 0)
1201 x = shallow_copy_rtx (x);
1202 y = shallow_copy_rtx (y);
1203 set_mem_size (x, size);
1204 set_mem_size (y, size);
1207 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align))
1208 move_by_pieces (x, y, INTVAL (size), align, 0);
1209 else if (emit_block_move_via_movmem (x, y, size, align,
1210 expected_align, expected_size))
1212 else if (may_use_call)
1213 retval = emit_block_move_via_libcall (x, y, size,
1214 method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL);
1216 emit_block_move_via_loop (x, y, size, align);
1218 if (method == BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM)
1225 emit_block_move (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method)
1227 return emit_block_move_hints (x, y, size, method, 0, -1);
1230 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the
1231 block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have
1232 already been placed on the stack. */
1235 block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void)
1237 /* If arguments are pushed on the stack, then they're safe. */
1241 /* If registers go on the stack anyway, any argument is sure to clobber
1242 an outgoing argument. */
1243 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1244 if (OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1247 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1248 if (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (fn) != 0)
1253 /* If any argument goes in memory, then it might clobber an outgoing
1256 CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far;
1259 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1260 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far, TREE_TYPE (fn), NULL_RTX, 0, 3);
1262 arg = TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn));
1263 for ( ; arg != void_list_node ; arg = TREE_CHAIN (arg))
1265 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg));
1266 rtx tmp = FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1);
1267 if (!tmp || !REG_P (tmp))
1269 if (targetm.calls.arg_partial_bytes (&args_so_far, mode, NULL, 1))
1271 FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1);
1277 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movmem pattern;
1278 return true if successful. */
1281 emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, unsigned int align,
1282 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
1284 rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT);
1285 int save_volatile_ok = volatile_ok;
1286 enum machine_mode mode;
1288 if (expected_align < align)
1289 expected_align = align;
1291 /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */
1294 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1295 including more than one in the machine description unless
1296 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1298 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode;
1299 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
1301 enum insn_code code = movmem_optab[(int) mode];
1302 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
1304 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing
1305 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1306 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1307 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1308 actual mode mask. */
1309 && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
1310 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size)
1311 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)))
1312 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD)
1313 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0
1314 || (*pred) (x, BLKmode))
1315 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate) == 0
1316 || (*pred) (y, BLKmode))
1317 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0
1318 || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode)))
1321 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
1324 op2 = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1);
1325 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate;
1326 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (op2, mode))
1327 op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op2);
1329 /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be
1330 nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so
1331 that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks
1332 emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */
1334 if (insn_data[(int) code].n_operands == 4)
1335 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (x, y, op2, opalign);
1337 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (x, y, op2, opalign,
1338 GEN_INT (expected_align),
1339 GEN_INT (expected_size));
1343 volatile_ok = save_volatile_ok;
1347 delete_insns_since (last);
1351 volatile_ok = save_volatile_ok;
1355 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy.
1356 Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */
1359 emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx dst, rtx src, rtx size, bool tailcall)
1361 rtx dst_addr, src_addr;
1362 tree call_expr, fn, src_tree, dst_tree, size_tree;
1363 enum machine_mode size_mode;
1366 /* Emit code to copy the addresses of DST and SRC and SIZE into new
1367 pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and
1370 dst_addr = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (dst, 0));
1371 src_addr = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (src, 0));
1373 dst_addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, dst_addr);
1374 src_addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, src_addr);
1376 dst_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, dst_addr);
1377 src_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, src_addr);
1379 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype);
1381 size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1);
1382 size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size);
1384 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1385 memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and
1386 the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For
1387 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1388 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
1390 size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size);
1392 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true);
1393 call_expr = build_call_expr (fn, 3, dst_tree, src_tree, size_tree);
1394 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr) = tailcall;
1396 retval = expand_normal (call_expr);
1401 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node
1402 for the function we use for block copies. The first time FOR_CALL
1403 is true, we call assemble_external. */
1405 static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn;
1408 init_block_move_fn (const char *asmspec)
1414 fn = get_identifier ("memcpy");
1415 args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node,
1416 const_ptr_type_node, sizetype,
1419 fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args);
1420 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1;
1421 TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1;
1422 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1;
1423 TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1;
1424 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT;
1425 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn) = 1;
1431 set_user_assembler_name (block_move_fn, asmspec);
1435 emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int for_call)
1437 static bool emitted_extern;
1440 init_block_move_fn (NULL);
1442 if (for_call && !emitted_extern)
1444 emitted_extern = true;
1445 make_decl_rtl (block_move_fn);
1446 assemble_external (block_move_fn);
1449 return block_move_fn;
1452 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit
1453 loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */
1454 /* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */
1457 emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size,
1458 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1460 rtx cmp_label, top_label, iter, x_addr, y_addr, tmp;
1461 enum machine_mode iter_mode;
1463 iter_mode = GET_MODE (size);
1464 if (iter_mode == VOIDmode)
1465 iter_mode = word_mode;
1467 top_label = gen_label_rtx ();
1468 cmp_label = gen_label_rtx ();
1469 iter = gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode);
1471 emit_move_insn (iter, const0_rtx);
1473 x_addr = force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
1474 y_addr = force_operand (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
1475 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
1477 emit_jump (cmp_label);
1478 emit_label (top_label);
1480 tmp = convert_modes (Pmode, iter_mode, iter, true);
1481 x_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, x_addr, tmp);
1482 y_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, y_addr, tmp);
1483 x = change_address (x, QImode, x_addr);
1484 y = change_address (y, QImode, y_addr);
1486 emit_move_insn (x, y);
1488 tmp = expand_simple_binop (iter_mode, PLUS, iter, const1_rtx, iter,
1489 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
1491 emit_move_insn (iter, tmp);
1493 emit_label (cmp_label);
1495 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter, size, LT, NULL_RTX, iter_mode,
1499 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
1500 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1503 move_block_to_reg (int regno, rtx x, int nregs, enum machine_mode mode)
1506 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1514 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
1515 x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
1517 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
1518 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1519 if (HAVE_load_multiple)
1521 last = get_last_insn ();
1522 pat = gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno), x,
1530 delete_insns_since (last);
1534 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
1535 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i),
1536 operand_subword_force (x, i, mode));
1539 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
1540 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1543 move_block_from_reg (int regno, rtx x, int nregs)
1550 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
1551 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1552 if (HAVE_store_multiple)
1554 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
1555 rtx pat = gen_store_multiple (x, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno),
1563 delete_insns_since (last);
1567 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
1569 rtx tem = operand_subword (x, i, 1, BLKmode);
1573 emit_move_insn (tem, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i));
1577 /* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from
1578 ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by
1579 a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the
1580 original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers.
1581 The new set has the same modes as the original set. */
1584 gen_group_rtx (rtx orig)
1589 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (orig) == PARALLEL);
1591 length = XVECLEN (orig, 0);
1592 tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * length);
1594 /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */
1595 i = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1;
1600 for (; i < length; i++)
1602 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 0));
1603 rtx offset = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 1);
1605 tmps[i] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_reg_rtx (mode), offset);
1608 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig), gen_rtvec_v (length, tmps));
1611 /* A subroutine of emit_group_load. Arguments as for emit_group_load,
1612 except that values are placed in TMPS[i], and must later be moved
1613 into corresponding XEXP (XVECEXP (DST, 0, i), 0) element. */
1616 emit_group_load_1 (rtx *tmps, rtx dst, rtx orig_src, tree type, int ssize)
1620 enum machine_mode m = GET_MODE (orig_src);
1622 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL);
1625 && !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m)
1626 && !MEM_P (orig_src)
1627 && GET_CODE (orig_src) != CONCAT)
1629 enum machine_mode imode = int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_src));
1630 if (imode == BLKmode)
1631 src = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_src), ssize, 0);
1633 src = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
1634 if (imode != BLKmode)
1635 src = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_src), src);
1636 emit_move_insn (src, orig_src);
1637 /* ...and back again. */
1638 if (imode != BLKmode)
1639 src = gen_lowpart (imode, src);
1640 emit_group_load_1 (tmps, dst, src, type, ssize);
1644 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1645 both on the stack and in registers. */
1646 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, 0), 0))
1651 /* Process the pieces. */
1652 for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++)
1654 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0));
1655 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 1));
1656 unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1659 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
1660 if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize)
1662 /* Arrange to shift the fragment to where it belongs.
1663 extract_bit_field loads to the lsb of the reg. */
1665 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
1666 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_src), type, i == start)
1667 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? upward : downward)
1672 shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT;
1673 bytelen = ssize - bytepos;
1674 gcc_assert (bytelen > 0);
1677 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
1678 from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can
1679 be loaded directly into the destination. */
1681 if (!MEM_P (orig_src)
1682 && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src)
1683 || (GET_MODE (orig_src) != mode
1684 && GET_MODE (orig_src) != VOIDmode)))
1686 if (GET_MODE (orig_src) == VOIDmode)
1687 src = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1689 src = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src));
1691 emit_move_insn (src, orig_src);
1694 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
1696 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (src))
1697 || MEM_ALIGN (src) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
1698 && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0
1699 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
1701 tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1702 emit_move_insn (tmps[i], adjust_address (src, mode, bytepos));
1704 else if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode)
1705 && GET_MODE (src) == mode
1706 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
1707 /* Let emit_move_complex do the bulk of the work. */
1709 else if (GET_CODE (src) == CONCAT)
1711 unsigned int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src));
1712 unsigned int slen0 = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0)));
1714 if ((bytepos == 0 && bytelen == slen0)
1715 || (bytepos != 0 && bytepos + bytelen <= slen))
1717 /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all
1718 have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation
1719 can be used to determine the object and the bit field
1721 tmps[i] = XEXP (src, bytepos / slen0);
1722 if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps[i])
1723 && (!REG_P (tmps[i]) || GET_MODE (tmps[i]) != mode))
1724 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (tmps[i], bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1725 (bytepos % slen0) * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1726 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode);
1732 gcc_assert (!bytepos);
1733 mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0);
1734 emit_move_insn (mem, src);
1735 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (mem, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1736 0, 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode);
1739 /* FIXME: A SIMD parallel will eventually lead to a subreg of a
1740 SIMD register, which is currently broken. While we get GCC
1741 to emit proper RTL for these cases, let's dump to memory. */
1742 else if (VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dst))
1745 int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src));
1748 mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0);
1749 emit_move_insn (mem, src);
1750 tmps[i] = adjust_address (mem, mode, (int) bytepos);
1752 else if (CONSTANT_P (src) && GET_MODE (dst) != BLKmode
1753 && XVECLEN (dst, 0) > 1)
1754 tmps[i] = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, src, GET_MODE(dst), bytepos);
1755 else if (CONSTANT_P (src)
1756 || (REG_P (src) && GET_MODE (src) == mode))
1759 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (src, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1760 bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT, 1, NULL_RTX,
1764 tmps[i] = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, mode, tmps[i],
1765 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, shift), tmps[i], 0);
1769 /* Emit code to move a block SRC of type TYPE to a block DST,
1770 where DST is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1771 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_SRC in bytes, or -1
1775 emit_group_load (rtx dst, rtx src, tree type, int ssize)
1780 tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * XVECLEN (dst, 0));
1781 emit_group_load_1 (tmps, dst, src, type, ssize);
1783 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
1784 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++)
1786 rtx d = XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0);
1789 emit_move_insn (d, tmps[i]);
1793 /* Similar, but load SRC into new pseudos in a format that looks like
1794 PARALLEL. This can later be fed to emit_group_move to get things
1795 in the right place. */
1798 emit_group_load_into_temps (rtx parallel, rtx src, tree type, int ssize)
1803 vec = rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (parallel, 0));
1804 emit_group_load_1 (&RTVEC_ELT (vec, 0), parallel, src, type, ssize);
1806 /* Convert the vector to look just like the original PARALLEL, except
1807 with the computed values. */
1808 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (parallel, 0); i++)
1810 rtx e = XVECEXP (parallel, 0, i);
1811 rtx d = XEXP (e, 0);
1815 d = force_reg (GET_MODE (d), RTVEC_ELT (vec, i));
1816 e = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e), d, XEXP (e, 1));
1818 RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = e;
1821 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (parallel), vec);
1824 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are
1825 non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */
1828 emit_group_move (rtx dst, rtx src)
1832 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src) == PARALLEL
1833 && GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL
1834 && XVECLEN (src, 0) == XVECLEN (dst, 0));
1836 /* Skip first entry if NULL. */
1837 for (i = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
1838 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0),
1839 XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0));
1842 /* Move a group of registers represented by a PARALLEL into pseudos. */
1845 emit_group_move_into_temps (rtx src)
1847 rtvec vec = rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (src, 0));
1850 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
1852 rtx e = XVECEXP (src, 0, i);
1853 rtx d = XEXP (e, 0);
1856 e = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e), copy_to_reg (d), XEXP (e, 1));
1857 RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = e;
1860 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (src), vec);
1863 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block ORIG_DST of type TYPE,
1864 where SRC is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1865 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_DST, or -1 if not
1869 emit_group_store (rtx orig_dst, rtx src, tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int ssize)
1872 int start, finish, i;
1873 enum machine_mode m = GET_MODE (orig_dst);
1875 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src) == PARALLEL);
1877 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m)
1878 && !MEM_P (orig_dst) && GET_CODE (orig_dst) != CONCAT)
1880 enum machine_mode imode = int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_dst));
1881 if (imode == BLKmode)
1882 dst = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_dst), ssize, 0);
1884 dst = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
1885 emit_group_store (dst, src, type, ssize);
1886 if (imode != BLKmode)
1887 dst = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_dst), dst);
1888 emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst);
1892 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1893 both on the stack and in registers. */
1894 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0))
1898 finish = XVECLEN (src, 0);
1900 tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * finish);
1902 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
1903 for (i = start; i < finish; i++)
1905 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0);
1906 if (!REG_P (reg) || REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1908 tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg));
1909 emit_move_insn (tmps[i], reg);
1915 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
1916 from strange tricks we might play. */
1918 if (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL)
1922 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
1923 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
1924 so no action is necessary. */
1925 if (rtx_equal_p (dst, src))
1928 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
1929 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
1932 temp = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst), ssize, 0);
1933 emit_group_store (temp, src, type, ssize);
1934 emit_group_load (dst, temp, type, ssize);
1937 else if (!MEM_P (dst) && GET_CODE (dst) != CONCAT)
1939 enum machine_mode outer = GET_MODE (dst);
1940 enum machine_mode inner;
1941 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos;
1945 if (!REG_P (dst) || REGNO (dst) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1946 dst = gen_reg_rtx (outer);
1948 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
1949 /* If the first element of the vector is the low part
1950 of the destination mode, use a paradoxical subreg to
1951 initialize the destination. */
1954 inner = GET_MODE (tmps[start]);
1955 bytepos = subreg_lowpart_offset (inner, outer);
1956 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, start), 1)) == bytepos)
1958 temp = simplify_gen_subreg (outer, tmps[start],
1962 emit_move_insn (dst, temp);
1969 /* If the first element wasn't the low part, try the last. */
1971 && start < finish - 1)
1973 inner = GET_MODE (tmps[finish - 1]);
1974 bytepos = subreg_lowpart_offset (inner, outer);
1975 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, finish - 1), 1)) == bytepos)
1977 temp = simplify_gen_subreg (outer, tmps[finish - 1],
1981 emit_move_insn (dst, temp);
1988 /* Otherwise, simply initialize the result to zero. */
1990 emit_move_insn (dst, CONST0_RTX (outer));
1993 /* Process the pieces. */
1994 for (i = start; i < finish; i++)
1996 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 1));
1997 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (tmps[i]);
1998 unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2001 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2002 if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize)
2004 /* store_bit_field always takes its value from the lsb.
2005 Move the fragment to the lsb if it's not already there. */
2007 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
2008 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_dst), type, i == start)
2009 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? upward : downward)
2015 int shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2016 tmps[i] = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, mode, tmps[i],
2017 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, shift),
2020 bytelen = ssize - bytepos;
2023 if (GET_CODE (dst) == CONCAT)
2025 if (bytepos + bytelen <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))))
2026 dest = XEXP (dst, 0);
2027 else if (bytepos >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))))
2029 bytepos -= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0)));
2030 dest = XEXP (dst, 1);
2034 gcc_assert (bytepos == 0 && XVECLEN (src, 0));
2035 dest = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dest),
2036 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)), 0);
2037 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, GET_MODE (tmps[i]), bytepos),
2044 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2046 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (dest))
2047 || MEM_ALIGN (dest) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2048 && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0
2049 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
2050 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, mode, bytepos), tmps[i]);
2052 store_bit_field (dest, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT,
2056 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2057 if (orig_dst != dst)
2058 emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst);
2061 /* Generate code to copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a
2062 set of registers starting with SRCREG into TGTBLK. If TGTBLK
2063 is null, a stack temporary is created. TGTBLK is returned.
2065 The purpose of this routine is to handle functions that return
2066 BLKmode structures in registers. Some machines (the PA for example)
2067 want to return all small structures in registers regardless of the
2068 structure's alignment. */
2071 copy_blkmode_from_reg (rtx tgtblk, rtx srcreg, tree type)
2073 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
2074 rtx src = NULL, dst = NULL;
2075 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type), BITS_PER_WORD);
2076 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, xbitpos, padding_correction = 0;
2080 tgtblk = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
2082 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)),
2084 preserve_temp_slots (tgtblk);
2087 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it
2088 into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2090 if (GET_MODE (srcreg) != BLKmode
2091 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (srcreg)) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
2092 srcreg = convert_to_mode (word_mode, srcreg, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type));
2094 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see whether
2095 SRCREG is padded on the left or on the right. If it's on the left,
2096 set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of bits to skip.
2098 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2099 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2100 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2101 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2102 end of the register. */
2103 if (bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD != 0
2104 && (targetm.calls.return_in_msb (type)
2106 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN))
2108 = (BITS_PER_WORD - ((bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD) * BITS_PER_UNIT));
2110 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bites at a time.
2112 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use
2113 strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current
2115 for (bitpos = 0, xbitpos = padding_correction;
2116 bitpos < bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2117 bitpos += bitsize, xbitpos += bitsize)
2119 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2120 word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2121 (the first time through). */
2122 if (xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0
2123 || xbitpos == padding_correction)
2124 src = operand_subword_force (srcreg, xbitpos / BITS_PER_WORD,
2127 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2129 if (bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0)
2130 dst = operand_subword (tgtblk, bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD, 1, BLKmode);
2132 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2133 xbitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2134 store_bit_field (dst, bitsize, bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, word_mode,
2135 extract_bit_field (src, bitsize,
2136 xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, 1,
2137 NULL_RTX, word_mode, word_mode));
2143 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2144 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2147 use_reg (rtx *call_fusage, rtx reg)
2149 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg) && REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
2152 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
2153 gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, reg), *call_fusage);
2156 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2157 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2160 use_regs (rtx *call_fusage, int regno, int nregs)
2164 gcc_assert (regno + nregs <= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
2166 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
2167 use_reg (call_fusage, regno_reg_rtx[regno + i]);
2170 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2171 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2172 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2175 use_group_regs (rtx *call_fusage, rtx regs)
2179 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (regs, 0); i++)
2181 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (regs, 0, i), 0);
2183 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2184 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2185 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2186 if (reg != 0 && REG_P (reg))
2187 use_reg (call_fusage, reg);
2192 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be
2193 stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is
2194 a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2195 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. Return nonzero if a
2196 call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */
2199 can_store_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
2200 rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode),
2201 void *constfundata, unsigned int align)
2203 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l;
2204 unsigned int max_size;
2205 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
2206 enum machine_mode mode, tmode;
2207 enum insn_code icode;
2214 if (! STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align))
2217 tmode = mode_for_size (STORE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
2218 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
2219 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
2222 enum machine_mode xmode;
2224 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
2226 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2227 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > STORE_MAX_PIECES
2228 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
2231 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
2234 /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2235 successively smaller modes. */
2238 reverse <= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT || HAVE_POST_DECREMENT);
2243 max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
2244 while (max_size > 1)
2246 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2247 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2248 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2251 if (mode == VOIDmode)
2254 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
2255 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
2256 && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2258 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2265 cst = (*constfun) (constfundata, offset, mode);
2266 if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (cst))
2276 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2279 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2286 /* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by
2287 CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a
2288 pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2289 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume.
2290 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
2291 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
2295 store_by_pieces (rtx to, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
2296 rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode),
2297 void *constfundata, unsigned int align, int endp)
2299 struct store_by_pieces data;
2303 gcc_assert (endp != 2);
2307 gcc_assert (STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align));
2308 data.constfun = constfun;
2309 data.constfundata = constfundata;
2312 store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align);
2317 gcc_assert (!data.reverse);
2322 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data.explicit_inc_to > 0)
2323 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data.to_addr, constm1_rtx));
2325 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (data.to_addr,
2328 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data.to, QImode, data.to_addr,
2335 to1 = adjust_address (data.to, QImode, data.offset);
2343 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2344 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2347 clear_by_pieces (rtx to, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, unsigned int align)
2349 struct store_by_pieces data;
2354 data.constfun = clear_by_pieces_1;
2355 data.constfundata = NULL;
2358 store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align);
2361 /* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces.
2362 Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */
2365 clear_by_pieces_1 (void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
2366 HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
2367 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
2372 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces.
2373 Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2374 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2377 store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
2378 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
2380 rtx to_addr = XEXP (data->to, 0);
2381 unsigned int max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
2382 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
2383 enum insn_code icode;
2386 data->to_addr = to_addr;
2388 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
2389 || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
2391 data->explicit_inc_to = 0;
2393 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
2395 data->offset = data->len;
2397 /* If storing requires more than two move insns,
2398 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2399 and use post-increment if available. */
2400 if (!data->autinc_to
2401 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data->len, align, max_size) > 2)
2403 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using. */
2404 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2405 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2406 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2409 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data->reverse && ! data->autinc_to)
2411 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, data->len));
2412 data->autinc_to = 1;
2413 data->explicit_inc_to = -1;
2416 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data->reverse
2417 && ! data->autinc_to)
2419 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
2420 data->autinc_to = 1;
2421 data->explicit_inc_to = 1;
2424 if ( !data->autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
2425 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
2428 tmode = mode_for_size (STORE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
2429 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
2430 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
2433 enum machine_mode xmode;
2435 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
2437 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2438 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > STORE_MAX_PIECES
2439 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
2442 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
2445 /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2446 successively smaller modes. */
2448 while (max_size > 1)
2450 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2451 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2452 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2455 if (mode == VOIDmode)
2458 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
2459 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2460 store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, data);
2462 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2465 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2466 gcc_assert (!data->len);
2469 /* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate
2470 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2471 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2474 store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*genfun) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode mode,
2475 struct store_by_pieces *data)
2477 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2480 while (data->len >= size)
2483 data->offset -= size;
2485 if (data->autinc_to)
2486 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr,
2489 to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset);
2491 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
2492 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
2493 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) size)));
2495 cst = (*data->constfun) (data->constfundata, data->offset, mode);
2496 emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, cst));
2498 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
2499 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
2501 if (! data->reverse)
2502 data->offset += size;
2508 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is
2509 its length in bytes. */
2512 clear_storage_hints (rtx object, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method,
2513 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
2515 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (object);
2518 gcc_assert (method == BLOCK_OP_NORMAL || method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL);
2520 /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode,
2521 just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */
2523 && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2524 && INTVAL (size) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
2526 rtx zero = CONST0_RTX (mode);
2529 emit_move_insn (object, zero);
2533 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode))
2535 zero = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode));
2538 write_complex_part (object, zero, 0);
2539 write_complex_part (object, zero, 1);
2545 if (size == const0_rtx)
2548 align = MEM_ALIGN (object);
2550 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2551 && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align))
2552 clear_by_pieces (object, INTVAL (size), align);
2553 else if (set_storage_via_setmem (object, size, const0_rtx, align,
2554 expected_align, expected_size))
2557 return set_storage_via_libcall (object, size, const0_rtx,
2558 method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL);
2564 clear_storage (rtx object, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method)
2566 return clear_storage_hints (object, size, method, 0, -1);
2570 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset.
2571 Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */
2574 set_storage_via_libcall (rtx object, rtx size, rtx val, bool tailcall)
2576 tree call_expr, fn, object_tree, size_tree, val_tree;
2577 enum machine_mode size_mode;
2580 /* Emit code to copy OBJECT and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then
2581 place those into new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and use them later. */
2583 object = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (object, 0));
2585 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype);
2586 size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1);
2587 size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size);
2589 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
2590 memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and
2591 the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For
2592 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
2593 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
2595 object_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, object);
2596 if (GET_CODE (val) != CONST_INT)
2597 val = convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node), val, 1);
2598 size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size);
2599 val_tree = make_tree (integer_type_node, val);
2601 fn = clear_storage_libcall_fn (true);
2602 call_expr = build_call_expr (fn, 3,
2603 object_tree, integer_zero_node, size_tree);
2604 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr) = tailcall;
2606 retval = expand_normal (call_expr);
2611 /* A subroutine of set_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node
2612 for the function we use for block clears. The first time FOR_CALL
2613 is true, we call assemble_external. */
2615 static GTY(()) tree block_clear_fn;
2618 init_block_clear_fn (const char *asmspec)
2620 if (!block_clear_fn)
2624 fn = get_identifier ("memset");
2625 args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node,
2626 integer_type_node, sizetype,
2629 fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args);
2630 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1;
2631 TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1;
2632 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1;
2633 TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1;
2634 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT;
2635 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn) = 1;
2637 block_clear_fn = fn;
2641 set_user_assembler_name (block_clear_fn, asmspec);
2645 clear_storage_libcall_fn (int for_call)
2647 static bool emitted_extern;
2649 if (!block_clear_fn)
2650 init_block_clear_fn (NULL);
2652 if (for_call && !emitted_extern)
2654 emitted_extern = true;
2655 make_decl_rtl (block_clear_fn);
2656 assemble_external (block_clear_fn);
2659 return block_clear_fn;
2662 /* Expand a setmem pattern; return true if successful. */
2665 set_storage_via_setmem (rtx object, rtx size, rtx val, unsigned int align,
2666 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
2668 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2669 including more than one in the machine description unless
2670 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2672 rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT);
2673 enum machine_mode mode;
2675 if (expected_align < align)
2676 expected_align = align;
2678 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode;
2679 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
2681 enum insn_code code = setmem_optab[(int) mode];
2682 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
2684 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing
2685 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than
2686 BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than
2687 the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will
2688 definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */
2689 && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2690 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size)
2691 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)))
2692 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD)
2693 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0
2694 || (*pred) (object, BLKmode))
2695 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0
2696 || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode)))
2699 enum machine_mode char_mode;
2700 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
2703 opsize = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1);
2704 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate;
2705 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (opsize, mode))
2706 opsize = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, opsize);
2709 char_mode = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].mode;
2710 if (char_mode != VOIDmode)
2712 opchar = convert_to_mode (char_mode, opchar, 1);
2713 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate;
2714 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (opchar, char_mode))
2715 opchar = copy_to_mode_reg (char_mode, opchar);
2718 if (insn_data[(int) code].n_operands == 4)
2719 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (object, opsize, opchar, opalign);
2721 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (object, opsize, opchar, opalign,
2722 GEN_INT (expected_align),
2723 GEN_INT (expected_size));
2730 delete_insns_since (last);
2738 /* Write to one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Write VAL to
2739 the real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if its true. */
2742 write_complex_part (rtx cplx, rtx val, bool imag_p)
2744 enum machine_mode cmode;
2745 enum machine_mode imode;
2748 if (GET_CODE (cplx) == CONCAT)
2750 emit_move_insn (XEXP (cplx, imag_p), val);
2754 cmode = GET_MODE (cplx);
2755 imode = GET_MODE_INNER (cmode);
2756 ibitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode);
2758 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2759 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2760 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2761 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2762 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2765 emit_move_insn (adjust_address_nv (cplx, imode,
2766 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0),
2771 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2772 will work. This special case is important, since store_bit_field
2773 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2774 correspond to TCmode. */
2775 if (ibitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD
2776 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2777 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2778 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2779 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2781 && REGNO (cplx) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2782 && hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (cplx)][cmode] % 2 == 0))
2784 rtx part = simplify_gen_subreg (imode, cplx, cmode,
2785 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0);
2788 emit_move_insn (part, val);
2792 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2793 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx) && ibitsize < BITS_PER_WORD);
2796 store_bit_field (cplx, ibitsize, imag_p ? ibitsize : 0, imode, val);
2799 /* Extract one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Extract the
2800 real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if it's true. */
2803 read_complex_part (rtx cplx, bool imag_p)
2805 enum machine_mode cmode, imode;
2808 if (GET_CODE (cplx) == CONCAT)
2809 return XEXP (cplx, imag_p);
2811 cmode = GET_MODE (cplx);
2812 imode = GET_MODE_INNER (cmode);
2813 ibitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode);
2815 /* Special case reads from complex constants that got spilled to memory. */
2816 if (MEM_P (cplx) && GET_CODE (XEXP (cplx, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF)
2818 tree decl = SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (cplx, 0));
2819 if (decl && TREE_CODE (decl) == COMPLEX_CST)
2821 tree part = imag_p ? TREE_IMAGPART (decl) : TREE_REALPART (decl);
2822 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (part))
2823 return expand_expr (part, NULL_RTX, imode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
2827 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2828 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2829 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2830 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2831 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2833 return adjust_address_nv (cplx, imode,
2834 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0);
2836 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2837 will work. This special case is important, since extract_bit_field
2838 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2839 correspond to TCmode. */
2840 if (ibitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD
2841 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2842 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2843 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2844 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2846 && REGNO (cplx) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2847 && hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (cplx)][cmode] % 2 == 0))
2849 rtx ret = simplify_gen_subreg (imode, cplx, cmode,
2850 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0);
2854 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2855 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx) && ibitsize < BITS_PER_WORD);
2858 return extract_bit_field (cplx, ibitsize, imag_p ? ibitsize : 0,
2859 true, NULL_RTX, imode, imode);
2862 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Yet another lowpart generator.
2863 NEW_MODE and OLD_MODE are the same size. Return NULL if X cannot be
2864 represented in NEW_MODE. If FORCE is true, this will never happen, as
2865 we'll force-create a SUBREG if needed. */
2868 emit_move_change_mode (enum machine_mode new_mode,
2869 enum machine_mode old_mode, rtx x, bool force)
2873 if (push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
2875 ret = gen_rtx_MEM (new_mode, XEXP (x, 0));
2876 MEM_COPY_ATTRIBUTES (ret, x);
2880 /* We don't have to worry about changing the address since the
2881 size in bytes is supposed to be the same. */
2882 if (reload_in_progress)
2884 /* Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any
2885 substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */
2886 ret = adjust_address_nv (x, new_mode, 0);
2887 copy_replacements (x, ret);
2890 ret = adjust_address (x, new_mode, 0);
2894 /* Note that we do want simplify_subreg's behavior of validating
2895 that the new mode is ok for a hard register. If we were to use
2896 simplify_gen_subreg, we would create the subreg, but would
2897 probably run into the target not being able to implement it. */
2898 /* Except, of course, when FORCE is true, when this is exactly what
2899 we want. Which is needed for CCmodes on some targets. */
2901 ret = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, x, old_mode, 0);
2903 ret = simplify_subreg (new_mode, x, old_mode, 0);
2909 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X using
2910 an integer mode of the same size as MODE. Returns the instruction
2911 emitted, or NULL if such a move could not be generated. */
2914 emit_move_via_integer (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y, bool force)
2916 enum machine_mode imode;
2917 enum insn_code code;
2919 /* There must exist a mode of the exact size we require. */
2920 imode = int_mode_for_mode (mode);
2921 if (imode == BLKmode)
2924 /* The target must support moves in this mode. */
2925 code = mov_optab->handlers[imode].insn_code;
2926 if (code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
2929 x = emit_move_change_mode (imode, mode, x, force);
2932 y = emit_move_change_mode (imode, mode, y, force);
2935 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y));
2938 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. X is a push_operand in MODE.
2939 Return an equivalent MEM that does not use an auto-increment. */
2942 emit_move_resolve_push (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x)
2944 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0));
2945 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust;
2948 adjust = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2949 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
2950 adjust = PUSH_ROUNDING (adjust);
2952 if (code == PRE_DEC || code == POST_DEC)
2954 else if (code == PRE_MODIFY || code == POST_MODIFY)
2956 rtx expr = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
2959 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (expr) == PLUS || GET_CODE (expr) == MINUS);
2960 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (XEXP (expr, 1)) == CONST_INT);
2961 val = INTVAL (XEXP (expr, 1));
2962 if (GET_CODE (expr) == MINUS)
2964 gcc_assert (adjust == val || adjust == -val);
2968 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
2969 stack_pointer_delta. */
2970 temp = expand_simple_binop (Pmode, PLUS, stack_pointer_rtx,
2971 GEN_INT (adjust), stack_pointer_rtx,
2972 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
2973 if (temp != stack_pointer_rtx)
2974 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx, temp);
2981 temp = stack_pointer_rtx;
2986 temp = plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx, -adjust);
2992 return replace_equiv_address (x, temp);
2995 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Generate a move from Y into X.
2996 X is known to satisfy push_operand, and MODE is known to be complex.
2997 Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3000 emit_move_complex_push (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3002 enum machine_mode submode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
3005 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3006 unsigned int submodesize = GET_MODE_SIZE (submode);
3008 /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller than the
3009 machine can push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */
3010 if (PUSH_ROUNDING (submodesize) != submodesize)
3012 x = emit_move_resolve_push (mode, x);
3013 return emit_move_insn (x, y);
3017 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
3018 regardless of machine's endianness. */
3019 switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
3033 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3034 read_complex_part (y, imag_first));
3035 return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3036 read_complex_part (y, !imag_first));
3039 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Perform the move from Y to X
3040 via two moves of the parts. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3043 emit_move_complex_parts (rtx x, rtx y)
3045 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3046 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3047 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. */
3048 if (!reload_completed && !reload_in_progress
3049 && REG_P (x) && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, y))
3050 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x));
3052 write_complex_part (x, read_complex_part (y, false), false);
3053 write_complex_part (x, read_complex_part (y, true), true);
3055 return get_last_insn ();
3058 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3059 MODE is known to be complex. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3062 emit_move_complex (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3066 /* Need to take special care for pushes, to maintain proper ordering
3067 of the data, and possibly extra padding. */
3068 if (push_operand (x, mode))
3069 return emit_move_complex_push (mode, x, y);
3071 /* See if we can coerce the target into moving both values at once. */
3073 /* Move floating point as parts. */
3074 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
3075 && mov_optab->handlers[GET_MODE_INNER (mode)].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3077 /* Not possible if the values are inherently not adjacent. */
3078 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONCAT || GET_CODE (y) == CONCAT)
3080 /* Is possible if both are registers (or subregs of registers). */
3081 else if (register_operand (x, mode) && register_operand (y, mode))
3083 /* If one of the operands is a memory, and alignment constraints
3084 are friendly enough, we may be able to do combined memory operations.
3085 We do not attempt this if Y is a constant because that combination is
3086 usually better with the by-parts thing below. */
3087 else if ((MEM_P (x) ? !CONSTANT_P (y) : MEM_P (y))
3088 && (!STRICT_ALIGNMENT
3089 || get_mode_alignment (mode) == BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT))
3098 /* For memory to memory moves, optimal behavior can be had with the
3099 existing block move logic. */
3100 if (MEM_P (x) && MEM_P (y))
3102 emit_block_move (x, y, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)),
3103 BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL);
3104 return get_last_insn ();
3107 ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, true);
3112 return emit_move_complex_parts (x, y);
3115 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3116 MODE is known to be MODE_CC. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3119 emit_move_ccmode (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3123 /* Assume all MODE_CC modes are equivalent; if we have movcc, use it. */
3126 enum insn_code code = mov_optab->handlers[CCmode].insn_code;
3127 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3129 x = emit_move_change_mode (CCmode, mode, x, true);
3130 y = emit_move_change_mode (CCmode, mode, y, true);
3131 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y));
3135 /* Otherwise, find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */
3136 ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, false);
3137 gcc_assert (ret != NULL);
3141 /* Return true if word I of OP lies entirely in the
3142 undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3145 undefined_operand_subword_p (rtx op, int i)
3147 enum machine_mode innermode, innermostmode;
3149 if (GET_CODE (op) != SUBREG)
3151 innermode = GET_MODE (op);
3152 innermostmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op));
3153 offset = i * UNITS_PER_WORD + SUBREG_BYTE (op);
3154 /* The SUBREG_BYTE represents offset, as if the value were stored in
3155 memory, except for a paradoxical subreg where we define
3156 SUBREG_BYTE to be 0; undo this exception as in
3158 if (SUBREG_BYTE (op) == 0
3159 && GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode))
3161 int difference = (GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode));
3162 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
3163 offset += (difference / UNITS_PER_WORD) * UNITS_PER_WORD;
3164 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
3165 offset += difference % UNITS_PER_WORD;
3167 if (offset >= GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode)
3168 || offset <= -GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode))
3173 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3174 MODE is any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn
3175 pattern. Note that you will get better code if you define such
3176 patterns, even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
3179 emit_move_multi_word (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3186 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) >= UNITS_PER_WORD);
3188 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
3189 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
3190 if (push_operand (x, mode))
3191 x = emit_move_resolve_push (mode, x);
3193 /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address
3194 is scheduled for replacement. */
3195 if (reload_in_progress && MEM_P (x)
3196 && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (x, 0))) != XEXP (x, 0))
3197 x = replace_equiv_address_nv (x, inner);
3198 if (reload_in_progress && MEM_P (y)
3199 && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (y, 0))) != XEXP (y, 0))
3200 y = replace_equiv_address_nv (y, inner);
3204 need_clobber = false;
3206 i < (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3209 rtx xpart = operand_subword (x, i, 1, mode);
3212 /* Do not generate code for a move if it would come entirely
3213 from the undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3214 if (undefined_operand_subword_p (y, i))
3217 ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
3219 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
3220 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. Then we must
3221 be able to get a part of Y. */
3222 if (ypart == 0 && CONSTANT_P (y))
3224 y = use_anchored_address (force_const_mem (mode, y));
3225 ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
3227 else if (ypart == 0)
3228 ypart = operand_subword_force (y, i, mode);
3230 gcc_assert (xpart && ypart);
3232 need_clobber |= (GET_CODE (xpart) == SUBREG);
3234 last_insn = emit_move_insn (xpart, ypart);
3240 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3241 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3242 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3243 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3245 && ! (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3246 && need_clobber != 0)
3247 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x));
3254 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
3255 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
3256 are basically valid. */
3259 emit_move_insn_1 (rtx x, rtx y)
3261 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3262 enum insn_code code;
3264 gcc_assert ((unsigned int) mode < (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE);
3266 code = mov_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code;
3267 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3268 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y));
3270 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part. */
3271 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode))
3272 return emit_move_complex (mode, x, y);
3274 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT)
3276 rtx result = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, true);
3278 /* If we can't find an integer mode, use multi words. */
3282 return emit_move_multi_word (mode, x, y);
3285 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
3286 return emit_move_ccmode (mode, x, y);
3288 /* Try using a move pattern for the corresponding integer mode. This is
3289 only safe when simplify_subreg can convert MODE constants into integer
3290 constants. At present, it can only do this reliably if the value
3291 fits within a HOST_WIDE_INT. */
3292 if (!CONSTANT_P (y) || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3294 rtx ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, false);
3299 return emit_move_multi_word (mode, x, y);
3302 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
3303 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
3304 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
3305 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
3307 Return the last instruction emitted. */
3310 emit_move_insn (rtx x, rtx y)
3312 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3313 rtx y_cst = NULL_RTX;
3316 gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode
3317 && (GET_MODE (y) == mode || GET_MODE (y) == VOIDmode));
3322 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
3323 && (last_insn = compress_float_constant (x, y)))
3328 if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
3330 y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
3332 /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill,
3333 assume that the target's move expanders will also take care
3334 of the non-legitimate constant. */
3338 y = use_anchored_address (y);
3342 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
3345 && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))
3346 && ! push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
3348 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))))
3349 x = validize_mem (x);
3352 && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y), XEXP (y, 0))
3354 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y, 0)))))
3355 y = validize_mem (y);
3357 gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode);
3359 last_insn = emit_move_insn_1 (x, y);
3361 if (y_cst && REG_P (x)
3362 && (set = single_set (last_insn)) != NULL_RTX
3363 && SET_DEST (set) == x
3364 && ! rtx_equal_p (y_cst, SET_SRC (set)))
3365 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y_cst);
3370 /* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can
3371 perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the
3372 move as an extension. */
3375 compress_float_constant (rtx x, rtx y)
3377 enum machine_mode dstmode = GET_MODE (x);
3378 enum machine_mode orig_srcmode = GET_MODE (y);
3379 enum machine_mode srcmode;
3381 int oldcost, newcost;
3383 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, y);
3385 if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
3386 oldcost = rtx_cost (y, SET);
3388 oldcost = rtx_cost (force_const_mem (dstmode, y), SET);
3390 for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode));
3391 srcmode != orig_srcmode;
3392 srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode))
3395 rtx trunc_y, last_insn;
3397 /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */
3398 ic = can_extend_p (dstmode, srcmode, 0);
3399 if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3402 /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */
3403 if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode, &r))
3406 trunc_y = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r, srcmode);
3408 if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (trunc_y))
3410 /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform
3412 if (! (*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (trunc_y, srcmode))
3414 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3415 newcost = rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode, trunc_y), SET);
3416 if (oldcost < newcost)
3419 else if (float_extend_from_mem[dstmode][srcmode])
3421 trunc_y = force_const_mem (srcmode, trunc_y);
3422 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3423 newcost = rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode, trunc_y), SET);
3424 if (oldcost < newcost)
3426 trunc_y = validize_mem (trunc_y);
3431 /* For CSE's benefit, force the compressed constant pool entry
3432 into a new pseudo. This constant may be used in different modes,
3433 and if not, combine will put things back together for us. */
3434 trunc_y = force_reg (srcmode, trunc_y);
3435 emit_unop_insn (ic, x, trunc_y, UNKNOWN);
3436 last_insn = get_last_insn ();
3439 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y);
3447 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
3449 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
3450 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
3451 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
3453 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
3454 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
3455 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
3458 push_block (rtx size, int extra, int below)
3462 size = convert_modes (Pmode, ptr_mode, size, 1);
3463 if (CONSTANT_P (size))
3464 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size, extra));
3465 else if (REG_P (size) && extra == 0)
3466 anti_adjust_stack (size);
3469 temp = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, size);
3471 temp = expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab, temp, GEN_INT (extra),
3472 temp, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3473 anti_adjust_stack (temp);
3476 #ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3482 temp = virtual_outgoing_args_rtx;
3483 if (extra != 0 && below)
3484 temp = plus_constant (temp, extra);
3488 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
3489 temp = plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3490 -INTVAL (size) - (below ? 0 : extra));
3491 else if (extra != 0 && !below)
3492 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3493 negate_rtx (Pmode, plus_constant (size, extra)));
3495 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3496 negate_rtx (Pmode, size));
3499 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), temp);
3502 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3504 /* Emit single push insn. */
3507 emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, tree type)
3510 unsigned rounded_size = PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3512 enum insn_code icode;
3513 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
3515 stack_pointer_delta += PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3516 /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing
3517 MEM representing push operation to move expander. */
3518 icode = push_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
3519 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3521 if (((pred = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].predicate)
3522 && !((*pred) (x, mode))))
3523 x = force_reg (mode, x);
3524 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) (x));
3527 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == rounded_size)
3528 dest_addr = gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE, Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
3529 /* If we are to pad downward, adjust the stack pointer first and
3530 then store X into the stack location using an offset. This is
3531 because emit_move_insn does not know how to pad; it does not have
3533 else if (FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type) == downward)
3535 unsigned padding_size = rounded_size - GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
3536 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
3538 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx,
3539 expand_binop (Pmode,
3540 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3546 GEN_INT (rounded_size),
3547 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN));
3549 offset = (HOST_WIDE_INT) padding_size;
3550 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3551 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
3552 /* We have already decremented the stack pointer, so get the
3554 offset += (HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size;
3556 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC)
3557 /* We have already incremented the stack pointer, so get the
3559 offset -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size;
3561 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, GEN_INT (offset));
3565 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3566 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC. */
3567 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3568 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size));
3570 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC. */
3571 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3572 GEN_INT (rounded_size));
3574 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, dest_addr);
3577 dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, dest_addr);
3581 set_mem_attributes (dest, type, 1);
3583 if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls)
3584 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
3585 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
3586 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
3587 of sibling calls. */
3588 set_mem_alias_set (dest, 0);
3590 emit_move_insn (dest, x);
3594 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
3596 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
3598 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
3599 needed only if X is BLKmode.
3601 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume.
3603 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
3604 bytes of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
3605 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL bytes.
3606 REG must be a hard register in this case.
3607 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
3608 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
3611 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
3612 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
3614 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
3615 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
3616 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
3617 argument block has not been preallocated.
3619 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
3621 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
3622 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
3623 of bytes required. */
3626 emit_push_insn (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, tree type, rtx size,
3627 unsigned int align, int partial, rtx reg, int extra,
3628 rtx args_addr, rtx args_so_far, int reg_parm_stack_space,
3632 enum direction stack_direction
3633 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3639 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
3640 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
3641 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
3642 enum direction where_pad = FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
3644 /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement.
3646 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
3647 if (where_pad != none)
3648 where_pad = (where_pad == downward ? upward : downward);
3653 || (STRICT_ALIGNMENT && align < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)))
3655 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
3662 offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3663 used = partial - offset;
3665 if (mode != BLKmode)
3667 /* A value is to be stored in an insufficiently aligned
3668 stack slot; copy via a suitably aligned slot if
3670 size = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3671 if (!MEM_P (xinner))
3673 temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
3674 emit_move_insn (temp, xinner);
3681 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
3682 because registers will take care of them. */
3685 xinner = adjust_address (xinner, BLKmode, used);
3687 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3688 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3689 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3690 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3691 skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : used;
3693 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3694 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
3695 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
3696 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
3699 && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
3701 && MEM_ALIGN (xinner) >= align
3702 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size) - used, align))
3703 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
3704 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
3705 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
3706 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align))
3707 || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
3708 || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align / BITS_PER_UNIT)
3709 == (align / BITS_PER_UNIT)))
3710 && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size)) == INTVAL (size))
3712 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3713 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3714 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3715 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3716 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3717 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3719 move_by_pieces (NULL, xinner, INTVAL (size) - used, align, 0);
3722 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
3726 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
3727 to the address of that space. */
3729 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
3732 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
3733 size = GEN_INT (INTVAL (size) - used);
3735 size = expand_binop (GET_MODE (size), sub_optab, size,
3736 GEN_INT (used), NULL_RTX, 0,
3740 /* Get the address of the stack space.
3741 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
3742 A single stack adjust will do. */
3745 temp = push_block (size, extra, where_pad == downward);
3748 else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
3749 temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
3750 plus_constant (args_addr,
3751 skip + INTVAL (args_so_far)));
3753 temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
3754 plus_constant (gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3759 if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS)
3761 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
3762 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
3763 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
3765 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx, temp)
3766 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, temp))
3767 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
3770 target = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, temp);
3772 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
3773 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
3774 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
3775 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
3776 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
3777 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
3778 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
3779 set_mem_align (target, align);
3781 emit_block_move (target, xinner, size, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM);
3784 else if (partial > 0)
3786 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
3788 int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3791 /* # bytes of start of argument
3792 that we must make space for but need not store. */
3793 int offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3794 int args_offset = INTVAL (args_so_far);
3797 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3798 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3799 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3800 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3801 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3802 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3804 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
3805 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
3806 and leave the space uninitialized. */
3810 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
3811 allocate on the stack. Convert OFFSET to words too. */
3812 not_stack = (partial - offset) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3813 offset /= UNITS_PER_WORD;
3815 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3816 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3817 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3818 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3819 skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : not_stack;
3821 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
3822 x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
3824 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
3825 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
3826 if ((REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3827 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) != MODE_INT))
3828 x = copy_to_reg (x);
3830 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
3831 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
3832 has a size a multiple of a word. */
3833 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3834 for (i = not_stack; i < size; i++)
3836 for (i = size - 1; i >= not_stack; i--)
3838 if (i >= not_stack + offset)
3839 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x, i, mode),
3840 word_mode, NULL_TREE, NULL_RTX, align, 0, NULL_RTX,
3842 GEN_INT (args_offset + ((i - not_stack + skip)
3844 reg_parm_stack_space, alignment_pad);
3851 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3852 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3853 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3854 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3855 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3856 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3858 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3859 if (args_addr == 0 && PUSH_ARGS)
3860 emit_single_push_insn (mode, x, type);
3864 if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
3866 = memory_address (mode,
3867 plus_constant (args_addr,
3868 INTVAL (args_so_far)));
3870 addr = memory_address (mode, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, args_addr,
3872 dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, addr);
3874 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
3875 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
3876 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
3877 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
3878 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
3879 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
3880 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
3881 set_mem_align (dest, align);
3883 emit_move_insn (dest, x);
3887 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
3888 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
3889 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
3890 if (partial > 0 && reg != 0)
3892 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
3893 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
3894 if (GET_CODE (reg) == PARALLEL)
3895 emit_group_load (reg, x, type, -1);
3898 gcc_assert (partial % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0);
3899 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg), x, partial / UNITS_PER_WORD, mode);
3903 if (extra && args_addr == 0 && where_pad == stack_direction)
3904 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3906 if (alignment_pad && args_addr == 0)
3907 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad);
3910 /* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic
3914 get_subtarget (rtx x)
3918 /* Only registers can be subtargets. */
3920 /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */
3921 || REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3925 /* A subroutine of expand_assignment. Optimize FIELD op= VAL, where
3926 FIELD is a bitfield. Returns true if the optimization was successful,
3927 and there's nothing else to do. */
3930 optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize,
3931 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos,
3932 enum machine_mode mode1, rtx str_rtx,
3935 enum machine_mode str_mode = GET_MODE (str_rtx);
3936 unsigned int str_bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode);
3941 if (mode1 != VOIDmode
3942 || bitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD
3943 || str_bitsize > BITS_PER_WORD
3944 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (to)
3945 || TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to))
3949 if (!BINARY_CLASS_P (src)
3950 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (src)) != INTEGER_TYPE)
3953 op0 = TREE_OPERAND (src, 0);
3954 op1 = TREE_OPERAND (src, 1);
3957 if (!operand_equal_p (to, op0, 0))
3960 if (MEM_P (str_rtx))
3962 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset1;
3964 if (str_bitsize == 0 || str_bitsize > BITS_PER_WORD)
3965 str_mode = word_mode;
3966 str_mode = get_best_mode (bitsize, bitpos,
3967 MEM_ALIGN (str_rtx), str_mode, 0);
3968 if (str_mode == VOIDmode)
3970 str_bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode);
3973 bitpos %= str_bitsize;
3974 offset1 = (offset1 - bitpos) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
3975 str_rtx = adjust_address (str_rtx, str_mode, offset1);
3977 else if (!REG_P (str_rtx) && GET_CODE (str_rtx) != SUBREG)
3980 /* If the bit field covers the whole REG/MEM, store_field
3981 will likely generate better code. */
3982 if (bitsize >= str_bitsize)
3985 /* We can't handle fields split across multiple entities. */
3986 if (bitpos + bitsize > str_bitsize)
3989 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
3990 bitpos = str_bitsize - bitpos - bitsize;
3992 switch (TREE_CODE (src))
3996 /* For now, just optimize the case of the topmost bitfield
3997 where we don't need to do any masking and also
3998 1 bit bitfields where xor can be used.
3999 We might win by one instruction for the other bitfields
4000 too if insv/extv instructions aren't used, so that
4001 can be added later. */
4002 if (bitpos + bitsize != str_bitsize
4003 && (bitsize != 1 || TREE_CODE (op1) != INTEGER_CST))
4006 value = expand_expr (op1, NULL_RTX, str_mode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
4007 value = convert_modes (str_mode,
4008 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1)), value,
4009 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1)));
4011 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4012 we can alias adjacent data. */
4013 if (MEM_P (str_rtx))
4015 str_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx);
4016 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx, 0);
4017 set_mem_expr (str_rtx, 0);
4020 binop = TREE_CODE (src) == PLUS_EXPR ? add_optab : sub_optab;
4021 if (bitsize == 1 && bitpos + bitsize != str_bitsize)
4023 value = expand_and (str_mode, value, const1_rtx, NULL);
4026 value = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, str_mode, value,
4027 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, bitpos),
4029 result = expand_binop (str_mode, binop, str_rtx,
4030 value, str_rtx, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN);
4031 if (result != str_rtx)
4032 emit_move_insn (str_rtx, result);
4037 if (TREE_CODE (op1) != INTEGER_CST)
4039 value = expand_expr (op1, NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (str_rtx), EXPAND_NORMAL);
4040 value = convert_modes (GET_MODE (str_rtx),
4041 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1)), value,
4042 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1)));
4044 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4045 we can alias adjacent data. */
4046 if (MEM_P (str_rtx))
4048 str_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx);
4049 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx, 0);
4050 set_mem_expr (str_rtx, 0);
4053 binop = TREE_CODE (src) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? ior_optab : xor_optab;
4054 if (bitpos + bitsize != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (str_rtx)))
4056 rtx mask = GEN_INT (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize)
4058 value = expand_and (GET_MODE (str_rtx), value, mask,
4061 value = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (str_rtx), value,
4062 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, bitpos),
4064 result = expand_binop (GET_MODE (str_rtx), binop, str_rtx,
4065 value, str_rtx, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN);
4066 if (result != str_rtx)
4067 emit_move_insn (str_rtx, result);
4078 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO. If NONTEMPORAL
4079 is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
4082 expand_assignment (tree to, tree from, bool nontemporal)
4087 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
4088 if (TREE_CODE (to) == ERROR_MARK)
4090 result = expand_normal (from);
4094 /* Optimize away no-op moves without side-effects. */
4095 if (operand_equal_p (to, from, 0))
4098 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
4099 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
4100 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
4101 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
4103 if (handled_component_p (to)
4104 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to)) == ARRAY_TYPE)
4106 enum machine_mode mode1;
4107 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
4114 tem = get_inner_reference (to, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset, &mode1,
4115 &unsignedp, &volatilep, true);
4117 /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
4118 make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use. */
4120 to_rtx = expand_normal (tem);
4126 if (!MEM_P (to_rtx))
4128 /* We can get constant negative offsets into arrays with broken
4129 user code. Translate this to a trap instead of ICEing. */
4130 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (offset) == INTEGER_CST);
4131 expand_builtin_trap ();
4132 to_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, const0_rtx);
4135 offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
4136 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4137 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
4138 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
4140 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
4141 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
4144 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
4145 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
4147 && GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode
4148 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx, 0)) != VOIDmode
4150 && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0
4151 && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0
4152 && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1))
4154 to_rtx = adjust_address (to_rtx, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4158 to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx,
4159 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (to,
4163 /* Handle expand_expr of a complex value returning a CONCAT. */
4164 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == CONCAT)
4166 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (from)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
4168 gcc_assert (bitpos == 0);
4169 result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, false, nontemporal);
4173 gcc_assert (bitpos == 0 || bitpos == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode1));
4174 result = store_expr (from, XEXP (to_rtx, bitpos != 0), false,
4182 /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the
4183 DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */
4184 to_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4186 set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx, to, 0, bitpos);
4188 /* Deal with volatile and readonly fields. The former is only
4189 done for MEM. Also set MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P if needed. */
4191 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4192 if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (to))
4193 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4196 if (optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (bitsize, bitpos, mode1,
4200 result = store_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode1, from,
4201 TREE_TYPE (tem), get_alias_set (to),
4206 preserve_temp_slots (result);
4212 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
4213 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
4214 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
4215 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
4216 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
4218 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG
4219 since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension
4220 needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no
4221 computation is done before the call. */
4222 if (TREE_CODE (from) == CALL_EXPR && ! aggregate_value_p (from, from)
4223 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from))) == INTEGER_CST
4224 && ! ((TREE_CODE (to) == VAR_DECL || TREE_CODE (to) == PARM_DECL)
4225 && REG_P (DECL_RTL (to))))
4230 value = expand_normal (from);
4232 to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE);
4234 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4235 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4236 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)
4237 emit_group_load (to_rtx, value, TREE_TYPE (from),
4238 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from)));
4239 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode)
4240 emit_block_move (to_rtx, value, expr_size (from), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
4243 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to)))
4244 value = convert_memory_address (GET_MODE (to_rtx), value);
4245 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, value);
4247 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4253 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
4254 Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case). */
4257 to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE);
4259 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
4260 if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL
4261 && (REG_P (to_rtx) || GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL))
4266 temp = expand_expr (from, NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (to_rtx), EXPAND_NORMAL);
4268 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)
4269 emit_group_load (to_rtx, temp, TREE_TYPE (from),
4270 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from)));
4272 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, temp);
4274 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4280 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
4281 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
4282 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
4283 if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL && TREE_CODE (from) == INDIRECT_REF
4284 && current_function_returns_struct
4285 && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct)
4290 size = expr_size (from);
4291 from_rtx = expand_normal (from);
4293 emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL,
4294 VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4295 XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4296 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype),
4297 size, TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype)),
4298 TYPE_MODE (sizetype));
4300 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4306 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
4309 result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, 0, nontemporal);
4310 preserve_temp_slots (result);
4316 /* Emits nontemporal store insn that moves FROM to TO. Returns true if this
4317 succeeded, false otherwise. */
4320 emit_storent_insn (rtx to, rtx from)
4322 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (to), imode;
4323 enum insn_code code = storent_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code;
4326 if (code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4329 imode = insn_data[code].operand[0].mode;
4330 if (!insn_data[code].operand[0].predicate (to, imode))
4333 imode = insn_data[code].operand[1].mode;
4334 if (!insn_data[code].operand[1].predicate (from, imode))
4336 from = copy_to_mode_reg (imode, from);
4337 if (!insn_data[code].operand[1].predicate (from, imode))
4341 pattern = GEN_FCN (code) (to, from);
4342 if (pattern == NULL_RTX)
4345 emit_insn (pattern);
4349 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
4350 and storing the value into TARGET.
4352 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
4353 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
4354 because C has no operators that could combine two different
4355 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
4356 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
4359 If CALL_PARAM_P is nonzero, this is a store into a call param on the
4360 stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially.
4362 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try using a nontemporal store instruction. */
4365 store_expr (tree exp, rtx target, int call_param_p, bool nontemporal)
4368 rtx alt_rtl = NULL_RTX;
4369 int dont_return_target = 0;
4371 if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
4373 /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one
4374 branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to
4375 store the throw expression's nonexistent result. */
4376 gcc_assert (!call_param_p);
4377 expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
4380 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPOUND_EXPR)
4382 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
4384 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
4385 call_param_p ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4386 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, call_param_p,
4389 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COND_EXPR && GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
4391 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
4392 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
4393 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
4394 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
4396 rtx lab1 = gen_label_rtx (), lab2 = gen_label_rtx ();
4398 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4400 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), lab1);
4401 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, call_param_p,
4403 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2));
4406 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), target, call_param_p,
4413 else if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target))
4414 /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
4415 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
4416 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
4419 rtx inner_target = 0;
4421 /* We can do the conversion inside EXP, which will often result
4422 in some optimizations. Do the conversion in two steps: first
4423 change the signedness, if needed, then the extend. But don't
4424 do this if the type of EXP is a subtype of something else
4425 since then the conversion might involve more than just
4426 converting modes. */
4427 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
4428 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == 0
4429 && (!lang_hooks.reduce_bit_field_operations
4430 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (target))
4431 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)))))
4433 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp))
4434 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target))
4436 /* Some types, e.g. Fortran's logical*4, won't have a signed
4437 version, so use the mode instead. */
4439 = (signed_or_unsigned_type_for
4440 (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target), TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4442 ntype = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode
4443 (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4444 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4446 exp = fold_convert (ntype, exp);
4449 exp = fold_convert (lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode
4450 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4451 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)),
4454 inner_target = SUBREG_REG (target);
4457 temp = expand_expr (exp, inner_target, VOIDmode,
4458 call_param_p ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4460 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
4461 sure that we properly convert it. */
4462 if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode)
4464 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4465 temp, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4466 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4467 GET_MODE (target), temp,
4468 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4471 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target), temp,
4472 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4480 /* If we want to use a nontemporal store, force the value to
4482 tmp_target = nontemporal ? NULL_RTX : target;
4483 temp = expand_expr_real (exp, tmp_target, GET_MODE (target),
4485 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL),
4487 /* Return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register.
4488 If TARGET is a volatile mem ref, either return TARGET
4489 or return a reg copied *from* TARGET; ANSI requires this.
4491 Otherwise, if TEMP is not TARGET, return TEMP
4492 if it is constant (for efficiency),
4493 or if we really want the correct value. */
4494 if (!(target && REG_P (target)
4495 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
4496 && !(MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
4497 && ! rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4498 && CONSTANT_P (temp))
4499 dont_return_target = 1;
4502 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
4503 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
4504 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
4506 if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode
4507 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK
4508 && GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
4509 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4510 temp, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4512 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
4513 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary and emit the
4514 pending incrementations that have been queued when expanding EXP.
4515 Note that we cannot emit the whole queue blindly because this will
4516 effectively disable the POST_INC optimization later.
4518 If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
4519 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
4521 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
4522 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
4524 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
4525 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
4526 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
4527 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
4528 of volatile memory references. */
4530 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4531 || (temp != target && (side_effects_p (temp)
4532 || side_effects_p (target))))
4533 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK
4534 /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET,
4535 but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ
4536 from TARGET although it is really the same location. */
4537 && !(alt_rtl && rtx_equal_p (alt_rtl, target))
4538 /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call
4539 expr_size unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++)
4540 expr_size-hook must not be given objects that are not
4541 supposed to be bit-copied or bit-initialized. */
4542 && expr_size (exp) != const0_rtx)
4544 if (GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target)
4545 && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
4547 int unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
4548 if (dont_return_target)
4550 /* In this case, we will return TEMP,
4551 so make sure it has the proper mode.
4552 But don't forget to store the value into TARGET. */
4553 temp = convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target), temp, unsignedp);
4554 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4556 else if (GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
4557 emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
4559 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
4560 : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4562 convert_move (target, temp, unsignedp);
4565 else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode && TREE_CODE (exp) == STRING_CST)
4567 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string
4568 constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's
4569 actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data
4570 type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */
4571 rtx size = expr_size (exp);
4573 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
4574 && INTVAL (size) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp))
4575 emit_block_move (target, temp, size,
4577 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4580 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
4582 = size_binop (MIN_EXPR,
4583 make_tree (sizetype, size),
4584 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp)));
4586 = expand_expr (copy_size, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
4588 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL));
4591 /* Copy that much. */
4592 copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, copy_size_rtx,
4593 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype));
4594 emit_block_move (target, temp, copy_size_rtx,
4596 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4598 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
4599 Do all calculations in ptr_mode. */
4600 if (GET_CODE (copy_size_rtx) == CONST_INT)
4602 size = plus_constant (size, -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx));
4603 target = adjust_address (target, BLKmode,
4604 INTVAL (copy_size_rtx));
4608 size = expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype), sub_optab, size,
4609 copy_size_rtx, NULL_RTX, 0,
4612 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4613 if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx) != Pmode)
4614 copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, copy_size_rtx,
4615 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype));
4618 target = offset_address (target, copy_size_rtx,
4619 highest_pow2_factor (copy_size));
4620 label = gen_label_rtx ();
4621 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size, const0_rtx, LT, NULL_RTX,
4622 GET_MODE (size), 0, label);
4625 if (size != const0_rtx)
4626 clear_storage (target, size, BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
4632 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4633 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4634 else if (GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL)
4635 emit_group_load (target, temp, TREE_TYPE (exp),
4636 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4637 else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
4638 emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
4640 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4641 else if (nontemporal
4642 && emit_storent_insn (target, temp))
4643 /* If we managed to emit a nontemporal store, there is nothing else to
4648 temp = force_operand (temp, target);
4650 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4657 /* Helper for categorize_ctor_elements. Identical interface. */
4660 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (tree ctor, HOST_WIDE_INT *p_nz_elts,
4661 HOST_WIDE_INT *p_elt_count,
4664 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
4665 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, elt_count;
4666 tree value, purpose;
4668 /* Whether CTOR is a valid constant initializer, in accordance with what
4669 initializer_constant_valid_p does. If inferred from the constructor
4670 elements, true until proven otherwise. */
4671 bool const_from_elts_p = constructor_static_from_elts_p (ctor);
4672 bool const_p = const_from_elts_p ? true : TREE_STATIC (ctor);
4677 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor), idx, purpose, value)
4682 if (TREE_CODE (purpose) == RANGE_EXPR)
4684 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (purpose, 0);
4685 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (purpose, 1);
4687 if (host_integerp (lo_index, 1) && host_integerp (hi_index, 1))
4688 mult = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1)
4689 - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1);
4692 switch (TREE_CODE (value))
4696 HOST_WIDE_INT nz = 0, ic = 0;
4699 = categorize_ctor_elements_1 (value, &nz, &ic, p_must_clear);
4701 nz_elts += mult * nz;
4702 elt_count += mult * ic;
4704 if (const_from_elts_p && const_p)
4705 const_p = const_elt_p;
4711 if (!initializer_zerop (value))
4717 nz_elts += mult * TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value);
4718 elt_count += mult * TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value);
4722 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_REALPART (value)))
4724 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_IMAGPART (value)))
4732 for (v = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (value); v; v = TREE_CHAIN (v))
4734 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_VALUE (v)))
4745 if (const_from_elts_p && const_p)
4746 const_p = initializer_constant_valid_p (value, TREE_TYPE (value))
4753 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)) == UNION_TYPE
4754 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE))
4757 bool clear_this = true;
4759 if (!VEC_empty (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor)))
4761 /* We don't expect more than one element of the union to be
4762 initialized. Not sure what we should do otherwise... */
4763 gcc_assert (VEC_length (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor))
4766 init_sub_type = TREE_TYPE (VEC_index (constructor_elt,
4767 CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor),
4770 /* ??? We could look at each element of the union, and find the
4771 largest element. Which would avoid comparing the size of the
4772 initialized element against any tail padding in the union.
4773 Doesn't seem worth the effort... */
4774 if (simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)),
4775 TYPE_SIZE (init_sub_type)) == 1)
4777 /* And now we have to find out if the element itself is fully
4778 constructed. E.g. for union { struct { int a, b; } s; } u
4779 = { .s = { .a = 1 } }. */
4780 if (elt_count == count_type_elements (init_sub_type, false))
4785 *p_must_clear = clear_this;
4788 *p_nz_elts += nz_elts;
4789 *p_elt_count += elt_count;
4794 /* Examine CTOR to discover:
4795 * how many scalar fields are set to nonzero values,
4796 and place it in *P_NZ_ELTS;
4797 * how many scalar fields in total are in CTOR,
4798 and place it in *P_ELT_COUNT.
4799 * if a type is a union, and the initializer from the constructor
4800 is not the largest element in the union, then set *p_must_clear.
4802 Return whether or not CTOR is a valid static constant initializer, the same
4803 as "initializer_constant_valid_p (CTOR, TREE_TYPE (CTOR)) != 0". */
4806 categorize_ctor_elements (tree ctor, HOST_WIDE_INT *p_nz_elts,
4807 HOST_WIDE_INT *p_elt_count,
4812 *p_must_clear = false;
4815 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (ctor, p_nz_elts, p_elt_count, p_must_clear);
4818 /* Count the number of scalars in TYPE. Return -1 on overflow or
4819 variable-sized. If ALLOW_FLEXARR is true, don't count flexible
4820 array member at the end of the structure. */
4823 count_type_elements (tree type, bool allow_flexarr)
4825 const HOST_WIDE_INT max = ~((HOST_WIDE_INT)1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT-1));
4826 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
4830 tree telts = array_type_nelts (type);
4831 if (telts && host_integerp (telts, 1))
4833 HOST_WIDE_INT n = tree_low_cst (telts, 1) + 1;
4834 HOST_WIDE_INT m = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (type), false);
4837 else if (max / n > m)
4845 HOST_WIDE_INT n = 0, t;
4848 for (f = TYPE_FIELDS (type); f ; f = TREE_CHAIN (f))
4849 if (TREE_CODE (f) == FIELD_DECL)
4851 t = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f), false);
4854 /* Check for structures with flexible array member. */
4855 tree tf = TREE_TYPE (f);
4857 && TREE_CHAIN (f) == NULL
4858 && TREE_CODE (tf) == ARRAY_TYPE
4860 && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf))
4861 && integer_zerop (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf)))
4862 && !TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf))
4863 && int_size_in_bytes (type) >= 0)
4875 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
4877 /* Ho hum. How in the world do we guess here? Clearly it isn't
4878 right to count the fields. Guess based on the number of words. */
4879 HOST_WIDE_INT n = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4882 return n / UNITS_PER_WORD;
4889 return TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type);
4897 case REFERENCE_TYPE:
4909 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
4912 mostly_zeros_p (tree exp)
4914 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
4917 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, count, elts;
4920 categorize_ctor_elements (exp, &nz_elts, &count, &must_clear);
4924 elts = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (exp), false);
4926 return nz_elts < elts / 4;
4929 return initializer_zerop (exp);
4932 /* Return 1 if EXP contains all zeros. */
4935 all_zeros_p (tree exp)
4937 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
4940 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, count;
4943 categorize_ctor_elements (exp, &nz_elts, &count, &must_clear);
4944 return nz_elts == 0;
4947 return initializer_zerop (exp);
4950 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
4951 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
4952 TYPE is the type of the CONSTRUCTOR, not the element type.
4953 CLEARED is as for store_constructor.
4954 ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores.
4956 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
4957 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
4958 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
4959 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
4962 store_constructor_field (rtx target, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize,
4963 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, enum machine_mode mode,
4964 tree exp, tree type, int cleared, int alias_set)
4966 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR
4967 /* We can only call store_constructor recursively if the size and
4968 bit position are on a byte boundary. */
4969 && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0
4970 && (bitsize > 0 && bitsize % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0)
4971 /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just
4972 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
4973 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
4974 && (bitpos == 0 || MEM_P (target)))
4978 = adjust_address (target,
4979 GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode
4981 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target)))
4982 ? BLKmode : VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4985 /* Update the alias set, if required. */
4986 if (MEM_P (target) && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
4987 && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target) != 0)
4989 target = copy_rtx (target);
4990 set_mem_alias_set (target, alias_set);
4993 store_constructor (exp, target, cleared, bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4996 store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, alias_set, false);
4999 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
5000 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since
5001 safe_from_p has been called.
5002 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
5003 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
5004 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
5005 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
5008 store_constructor (tree exp, rtx target, int cleared, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
5010 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
5011 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5012 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5015 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
5019 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
5021 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
5024 /* If size is zero or the target is already cleared, do nothing. */
5025 if (size == 0 || cleared)
5027 /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */
5028 else if ((TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE
5029 || TREE_CODE (type) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE)
5030 && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
5031 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
5033 clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5037 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
5038 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
5039 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
5040 this probably loses. */
5041 else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp)
5042 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
5044 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5048 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure or
5049 if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros, clear
5050 the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a
5051 register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since
5052 clear_storage can't handle this case. */
5054 && (((int)VEC_length (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
5055 != fields_length (type))
5056 || mostly_zeros_p (exp))
5058 || ((HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target))
5061 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5065 if (REG_P (target) && !cleared)
5066 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target));
5068 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5069 corresponding field of TARGET. */
5070 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, field, value)
5072 enum machine_mode mode;
5073 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5074 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = 0;
5076 rtx to_rtx = target;
5078 /* Just ignore missing fields. We cleared the whole
5079 structure, above, if any fields are missing. */
5083 if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value))
5086 if (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (field), 1))
5087 bitsize = tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (field), 1);
5091 mode = DECL_MODE (field);
5092 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
5095 offset = DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field);
5096 if (host_integerp (offset, 0)
5097 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 0))
5099 bitpos = int_bit_position (field);
5103 bitpos = tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field), 0);
5110 = SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (offset,
5111 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp),
5114 offset_rtx = expand_normal (offset);
5115 gcc_assert (MEM_P (to_rtx));
5117 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
5118 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
5119 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
5121 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
5122 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
5125 to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx,
5126 highest_pow2_factor (offset));
5129 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5130 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a
5131 word, at the start of a word, try to widen it to a full
5132 word. This special case allows us to output C++ member
5133 function initializations in a form that the optimizers
5136 && bitsize < BITS_PER_WORD
5137 && bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0
5138 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5139 && TREE_CODE (value) == INTEGER_CST
5141 && bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD <= exp_size * BITS_PER_UNIT)
5143 tree type = TREE_TYPE (value);
5145 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) < BITS_PER_WORD)
5147 type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_size
5148 (BITS_PER_WORD, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type));
5149 value = fold_convert (type, value);
5152 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
5154 = fold_build2 (LSHIFT_EXPR, type, value,
5155 build_int_cst (type,
5156 BITS_PER_WORD - bitsize));
5157 bitsize = BITS_PER_WORD;
5162 if (MEM_P (to_rtx) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx)
5163 && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field))
5165 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
5166 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1;
5169 store_constructor_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode,
5170 value, type, cleared,
5171 get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field)));
5178 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT i;
5181 tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type);
5183 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt = 0;
5184 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt = 0;
5186 domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (type);
5187 const_bounds_p = (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)
5188 && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain)
5189 && host_integerp (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0)
5190 && host_integerp (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0));
5192 /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */
5195 minelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0);
5196 maxelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0);
5199 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array, clear
5200 the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
5201 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5204 else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp))
5208 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
5210 HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0;
5211 need_to_clear = ! const_bounds_p;
5213 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
5214 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index). It
5215 is also needed to check for missing elements. */
5216 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, index, value)
5218 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count;
5223 if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR)
5225 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0);
5226 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1);
5228 if (! host_integerp (lo_index, 1)
5229 || ! host_integerp (hi_index, 1))
5235 this_node_count = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1)
5236 - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1);
5239 this_node_count = 1;
5241 count += this_node_count;
5242 if (mostly_zeros_p (value))
5243 zero_count += this_node_count;
5246 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing
5247 elements, or if the incidence of zero elements is >=
5250 && (count < maxelt - minelt + 1
5251 || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count))
5255 if (need_to_clear && size > 0)
5258 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5260 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5264 if (!cleared && REG_P (target))
5265 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
5266 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target));
5268 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5269 corresponding element of TARGET, determined by counting the
5271 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), i, index, value)
5273 enum machine_mode mode;
5274 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5275 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
5277 rtx xtarget = target;
5279 if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value))
5282 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (elttype);
5283 mode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
5284 if (mode == BLKmode)
5285 bitsize = (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5286 ? tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5289 bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
5291 if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR)
5293 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0);
5294 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1);
5295 rtx index_r, pos_rtx;
5296 HOST_WIDE_INT lo, hi, count;
5299 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
5301 && host_integerp (lo_index, 0)
5302 && host_integerp (hi_index, 0)
5303 && (lo = tree_low_cst (lo_index, 0),
5304 hi = tree_low_cst (hi_index, 0),
5305 count = hi - lo + 1,
5308 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5309 && (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) * count
5312 lo -= minelt; hi -= minelt;
5313 for (; lo <= hi; lo++)
5315 bitpos = lo * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0);
5318 && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
5319 && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5320 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type))
5322 target = copy_rtx (target);
5323 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1;
5326 store_constructor_field
5327 (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value, type, cleared,
5328 get_alias_set (elttype));
5333 rtx loop_start = gen_label_rtx ();
5334 rtx loop_end = gen_label_rtx ();
5337 expand_normal (hi_index);
5338 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (domain);
5340 index = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL_TREE, domain);
5343 = gen_reg_rtx (promote_mode (domain, DECL_MODE (index),
5345 SET_DECL_RTL (index, index_r);
5346 store_expr (lo_index, index_r, 0, false);
5348 /* Build the head of the loop. */
5349 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5350 emit_label (loop_start);
5352 /* Assign value to element index. */
5354 fold_convert (ssizetype,
5355 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR,
5358 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)));
5361 size_binop (MULT_EXPR, position,
5362 fold_convert (ssizetype,
5363 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype)));
5365 pos_rtx = expand_normal (position);
5366 xtarget = offset_address (target, pos_rtx,
5367 highest_pow2_factor (position));
5368 xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0);
5369 if (TREE_CODE (value) == CONSTRUCTOR)
5370 store_constructor (value, xtarget, cleared,
5371 bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5373 store_expr (value, xtarget, 0, false);
5375 /* Generate a conditional jump to exit the loop. */
5376 exit_cond = build2 (LT_EXPR, integer_type_node,
5378 jumpif (exit_cond, loop_end);
5380 /* Update the loop counter, and jump to the head of
5382 expand_assignment (index,
5383 build2 (PLUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index),
5384 index, integer_one_node),
5387 emit_jump (loop_start);
5389 /* Build the end of the loop. */
5390 emit_label (loop_end);
5393 else if ((index != 0 && ! host_integerp (index, 0))
5394 || ! host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1))
5399 index = ssize_int (1);
5402 index = fold_convert (ssizetype,
5403 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR,
5406 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)));
5409 size_binop (MULT_EXPR, index,
5410 fold_convert (ssizetype,
5411 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype)));
5412 xtarget = offset_address (target,
5413 expand_normal (position),
5414 highest_pow2_factor (position));
5415 xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0);
5416 store_expr (value, xtarget, 0, false);
5421 bitpos = ((tree_low_cst (index, 0) - minelt)
5422 * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1));
5424 bitpos = (i * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1));
5426 if (MEM_P (target) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
5427 && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5428 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type))
5430 target = copy_rtx (target);
5431 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1;
5433 store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value,
5434 type, cleared, get_alias_set (elttype));
5442 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
5443 constructor_elt *ce;
5447 tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type);
5448 int elt_size = tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1);
5449 enum machine_mode eltmode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
5450 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5451 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
5452 rtvec vector = NULL;
5455 gcc_assert (eltmode != BLKmode);
5457 n_elts = TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type);
5458 if (REG_P (target) && VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (target)))
5460 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (target);
5462 icode = (int) vec_init_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code;
5463 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5467 vector = rtvec_alloc (n_elts);
5468 for (i = 0; i < n_elts; i++)
5469 RTVEC_ELT (vector, i) = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode));
5473 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the vector,
5474 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
5475 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5478 else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp))
5482 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0;
5485 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, value)
5487 int n_elts_here = tree_low_cst
5488 (int_const_binop (TRUNC_DIV_EXPR,
5489 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value)),
5490 TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0), 1);
5492 count += n_elts_here;
5493 if (mostly_zeros_p (value))
5494 zero_count += n_elts_here;
5497 /* Clear the entire vector first if there are any missing elements,
5498 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
5499 need_to_clear = (count < n_elts || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count);
5502 if (need_to_clear && size > 0 && !vector)
5505 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5507 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5511 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
5512 if (!cleared && !vector && REG_P (target))
5513 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5515 /* Store each element of the constructor into the corresponding
5516 element of TARGET, determined by counting the elements. */
5517 for (idx = 0, i = 0;
5518 VEC_iterate (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, ce);
5519 idx++, i += bitsize / elt_size)
5521 HOST_WIDE_INT eltpos;
5522 tree value = ce->value;
5524 bitsize = tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value)), 1);
5525 if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value))
5529 eltpos = tree_low_cst (ce->index, 1);
5535 /* Vector CONSTRUCTORs should only be built from smaller
5536 vectors in the case of BLKmode vectors. */
5537 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) != VECTOR_TYPE);
5538 RTVEC_ELT (vector, eltpos)
5539 = expand_normal (value);
5543 enum machine_mode value_mode =
5544 TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) == VECTOR_TYPE
5545 ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (value))
5547 bitpos = eltpos * elt_size;
5548 store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos,
5549 value_mode, value, type,
5550 cleared, get_alias_set (elttype));
5555 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode)
5557 gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (target), vector)));
5566 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
5567 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
5568 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
5569 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
5571 Always return const0_rtx unless we have something particular to
5574 TYPE is the type of the underlying object,
5576 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
5577 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
5578 reference to the containing structure.
5580 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
5583 store_field (rtx target, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos,
5584 enum machine_mode mode, tree exp, tree type, int alias_set,
5587 HOST_WIDE_INT width_mask = 0;
5589 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK)
5592 /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has
5595 return expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5596 else if (bitsize >= 0 && bitsize < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
5597 width_mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1;
5599 /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
5600 in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
5601 MODE == BLKmode. In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
5602 alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
5603 the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET). Then
5604 call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
5605 that object. Finally, load from the object into TARGET. This is not
5606 very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
5607 than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses. Perhaps this can be
5608 cleaned up later. It's tempting to make OBJECT readonly, but it's set
5609 twice, once with emit_move_insn and once via store_field. */
5612 && (REG_P (target) || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG))
5614 rtx object = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
5615 rtx blk_object = adjust_address (object, BLKmode, 0);
5617 if (bitsize != (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target)))
5618 emit_move_insn (object, target);
5620 store_field (blk_object, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, alias_set,
5623 emit_move_insn (target, object);
5625 /* We want to return the BLKmode version of the data. */
5629 if (GET_CODE (target) == CONCAT)
5631 /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */
5633 gcc_assert (!bitpos);
5634 return store_expr (exp, target, 0, nontemporal);
5637 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
5638 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
5639 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
5641 if (mode == VOIDmode
5642 || (mode != BLKmode && ! direct_store[(int) mode]
5643 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
5644 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5646 || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG
5647 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
5648 store it as a bit field. */
5650 && ((((MEM_ALIGN (target) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
5651 || bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
5652 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (target)))
5653 || (bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0)))
5654 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
5655 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
5658 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST
5659 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), bitsize) != 0))
5663 /* If EXP is a NOP_EXPR of precision less than its mode, then that
5664 implies a mask operation. If the precision is the same size as
5665 the field we're storing into, that mask is redundant. This is
5666 particularly common with bit field assignments generated by the
5668 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == NOP_EXPR)
5670 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
5671 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type)
5672 && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))
5673 && bitsize == TYPE_PRECISION (type))
5675 type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
5676 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type) && TYPE_PRECISION (type) >= bitsize)
5677 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5681 temp = expand_normal (exp);
5683 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
5684 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
5685 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
5686 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
5687 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp)) == MODE_INT
5688 && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp))
5689 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE)
5690 temp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (temp), temp,
5691 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp))
5695 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to
5697 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
5698 && mode != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
5699 temp = convert_modes (mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), temp, 1);
5701 /* If the modes of TARGET and TEMP are both BLKmode, both
5702 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
5703 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. */
5704 if (GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
5706 gcc_assert (MEM_P (target) && MEM_P (temp)
5707 && !(bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT));
5709 target = adjust_address (target, VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5710 emit_block_move (target, temp,
5711 GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
5718 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
5719 store_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, temp);
5725 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
5726 rtx to_rtx = adjust_address (target, mode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5728 if (to_rtx == target)
5729 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
5731 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx, 1);
5732 if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx) != 0)
5733 set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx, alias_set);
5735 return store_expr (exp, to_rtx, 0, nontemporal);
5739 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
5740 an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these
5741 codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
5743 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
5744 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
5745 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
5746 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
5747 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
5748 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
5750 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
5751 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
5753 If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode. Otherwise, it
5754 is a mode that can be used to access the field. In that case, *PBITSIZE
5757 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
5758 VOIDmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
5759 this case, but the address of the object can be found.
5761 If KEEP_ALIGNING is true and the target is STRICT_ALIGNMENT, we don't
5762 look through nodes that serve as markers of a greater alignment than
5763 the one that can be deduced from the expression. These nodes make it
5764 possible for front-ends to prevent temporaries from being created by
5765 the middle-end on alignment considerations. For that purpose, the
5766 normal operating mode at high-level is to always pass FALSE so that
5767 the ultimate containing object is really returned; moreover, the
5768 associated predicate handled_component_p will always return TRUE
5769 on these nodes, thus indicating that they are essentially handled
5770 by get_inner_reference. TRUE should only be passed when the caller
5771 is scanning the expression in order to build another representation
5772 and specifically knows how to handle these nodes; as such, this is
5773 the normal operating mode in the RTL expanders. */
5776 get_inner_reference (tree exp, HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitsize,
5777 HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitpos, tree *poffset,
5778 enum machine_mode *pmode, int *punsignedp,
5779 int *pvolatilep, bool keep_aligning)
5782 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
5783 tree offset = size_zero_node;
5784 tree bit_offset = bitsize_zero_node;
5787 /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the
5788 outermost expression. */
5789 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
5791 size_tree = DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5792 if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
5793 mode = DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5795 *punsignedp = DECL_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5797 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
5799 size_tree = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5800 *punsignedp = BIT_FIELD_REF_UNSIGNED (exp);
5802 /* For vector types, with the correct size of access, use the mode of
5804 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == VECTOR_TYPE
5805 && TREE_TYPE (exp) == TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
5806 && tree_int_cst_equal (size_tree, TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))))
5807 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5811 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5812 *punsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5814 if (mode == BLKmode)
5815 size_tree = TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5817 *pbitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
5822 if (! host_integerp (size_tree, 1))
5823 mode = BLKmode, *pbitsize = -1;
5825 *pbitsize = tree_low_cst (size_tree, 1);
5828 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
5829 and find the ultimate containing object. */
5832 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
5835 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5836 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
5841 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5842 tree this_offset = component_ref_field_offset (exp);
5844 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go past it.
5845 This should only happen when folding expressions made during
5846 type construction. */
5847 if (this_offset == 0)
5850 offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset, this_offset);
5851 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5852 DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field));
5854 /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */
5859 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
5861 tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5862 tree low_bound = array_ref_low_bound (exp);
5863 tree unit_size = array_ref_element_size (exp);
5865 /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte.
5866 First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the
5867 index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of
5868 the array element. */
5869 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound))
5870 index = fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index),
5873 offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset,
5874 size_binop (MULT_EXPR,
5875 fold_convert (sizetype, index),
5884 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5885 bitsize_int (*pbitsize));
5888 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
5889 if (keep_aligning && STRICT_ALIGNMENT
5890 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp))
5891 > TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
5892 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
5893 < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
5894 && (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (exp))
5895 || TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
5903 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
5904 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
5907 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5911 /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a
5912 constant bit position. Otherwise, split it up. */
5913 if (host_integerp (offset, 0)
5914 && 0 != (tem = size_binop (MULT_EXPR,
5915 fold_convert (bitsizetype, offset),
5917 && 0 != (tem = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, tem, bit_offset))
5918 && host_integerp (tem, 0))
5919 *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (tem, 0), *poffset = 0;
5921 *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (bit_offset, 0), *poffset = offset;
5927 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF or an ARRAY_REF,
5928 look for whether EXP or any nested component-refs within EXP is marked
5932 contains_packed_reference (tree exp)
5934 bool packed_p = false;
5938 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
5942 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5943 packed_p = DECL_PACKED (field)
5944 || TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (field))
5945 || TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5953 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
5956 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
5962 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5968 /* Return a tree of sizetype representing the size, in bytes, of the element
5969 of EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */
5972 array_ref_element_size (tree exp)
5974 tree aligned_size = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 3);
5975 tree elmt_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
5977 /* If a size was specified in the ARRAY_REF, it's the size measured
5978 in alignment units of the element type. So multiply by that value. */
5981 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
5982 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
5983 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_size) != sizetype)
5984 aligned_size = fold_convert (sizetype, aligned_size);
5985 return size_binop (MULT_EXPR, aligned_size,
5986 size_int (TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (elmt_type)));
5989 /* Otherwise, take the size from that of the element type. Substitute
5990 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
5992 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elmt_type), exp);
5995 /* Return a tree representing the lower bound of the array mentioned in
5996 EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */
5999 array_ref_low_bound (tree exp)
6001 tree domain_type = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
6003 /* If a lower bound is specified in EXP, use it. */
6004 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
6005 return TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
6007 /* Otherwise, if there is a domain type and it has a lower bound, use it,
6008 substituting for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6009 if (domain_type && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type))
6010 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type), exp);
6012 /* Otherwise, return a zero of the appropriate type. */
6013 return build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)), 0);
6016 /* Return a tree representing the upper bound of the array mentioned in
6017 EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */
6020 array_ref_up_bound (tree exp)
6022 tree domain_type = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
6024 /* If there is a domain type and it has an upper bound, use it, substituting
6025 for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6026 if (domain_type && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type))
6027 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type), exp);
6029 /* Otherwise fail. */
6033 /* Return a tree representing the offset, in bytes, of the field referenced
6034 by EXP. This does not include any offset in DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET. */
6037 component_ref_field_offset (tree exp)
6039 tree aligned_offset = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
6040 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
6042 /* If an offset was specified in the COMPONENT_REF, it's the offset measured
6043 in units of DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN / BITS_PER_UNIT. So multiply by that
6047 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6048 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6049 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_offset) != sizetype)
6050 aligned_offset = fold_convert (sizetype, aligned_offset);
6051 return size_binop (MULT_EXPR, aligned_offset,
6052 size_int (DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN (field) / BITS_PER_UNIT));
6055 /* Otherwise, take the offset from that of the field. Substitute
6056 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6058 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field), exp);
6061 /* Return 1 if T is an expression that get_inner_reference handles. */
6064 handled_component_p (tree t)
6066 switch (TREE_CODE (t))
6071 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
6072 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
6082 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return
6083 an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant.
6084 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and
6085 returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
6087 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
6090 force_operand (rtx value, rtx target)
6093 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6094 rtx subtarget = get_subtarget (target);
6095 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (value);
6097 /* Check for subreg applied to an expression produced by loop optimizer. */
6099 && !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (value))
6100 && !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value)))
6103 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value),
6104 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6105 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value),
6107 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6108 SUBREG_BYTE (value));
6109 code = GET_CODE (value);
6112 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
6113 if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
6114 && XEXP (value, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
6115 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
6116 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == LABEL_REF
6117 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == CONST))
6120 subtarget = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value));
6121 emit_move_insn (subtarget, value);
6125 if (ARITHMETIC_P (value))
6127 op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
6128 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2) && !(REG_P (op2) && op2 != subtarget))
6130 if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT)
6133 op2 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value), op2);
6136 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
6137 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
6138 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
6139 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
6140 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
6141 creating another one around this addition. */
6142 if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
6143 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 0)) == PLUS
6144 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0))
6145 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
6146 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
6148 rtx temp = expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code,
6149 XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0), op2,
6150 subtarget, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6151 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, temp,
6152 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value,
6154 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6157 op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
6158 op2 = force_operand (op2, NULL_RTX);
6162 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 1);
6164 if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value)))
6165 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
6166 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6168 return expand_divmod (0,
6169 FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value))
6170 ? RDIV_EXPR : TRUNC_DIV_EXPR,
6171 GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 0);
6173 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
6176 return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
6179 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
6182 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
6183 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6185 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
6186 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6189 if (UNARY_P (value))
6192 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value));
6193 op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), NULL_RTX);
6200 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
6201 convert_move (target, op1, code == ZERO_EXTEND);
6206 expand_fix (target, op1, code == UNSIGNED_FIX);
6210 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
6211 expand_float (target, op1, code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT);
6215 return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, target, 0);
6219 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
6220 /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be
6221 explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */
6222 if (GET_CODE (value) == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value))
6223 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (value))
6224 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)))))
6226 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value),
6227 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6228 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value),
6230 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6231 SUBREG_BYTE (value));
6237 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
6238 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
6239 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
6240 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
6242 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
6243 searches for optimization opportunities. */
6246 safe_from_p (rtx x, tree exp, int top_p)
6252 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
6253 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
6254 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
6255 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
6256 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
6257 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
6258 || (top_p && TREE_TYPE (exp) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
6259 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) != INTEGER_CST
6260 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != ARRAY_TYPE
6261 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == NULL_TREE
6262 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
6264 && GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode)
6265 /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
6267 && (XEXP (x, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
6268 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
6269 && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx))))
6272 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
6273 find the underlying pseudo. */
6274 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6277 if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6281 /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */
6282 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)))
6284 case tcc_declaration:
6285 exp_rtl = DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp);
6291 case tcc_exceptional:
6292 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TREE_LIST)
6296 if (TREE_VALUE (exp) && !safe_from_p (x, TREE_VALUE (exp), 0))
6298 exp = TREE_CHAIN (exp);
6301 if (TREE_CODE (exp) != TREE_LIST)
6302 return safe_from_p (x, exp, 0);
6305 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
6307 constructor_elt *ce;
6308 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
6311 VEC_iterate (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, ce);
6313 if ((ce->index != NULL_TREE && !safe_from_p (x, ce->index, 0))
6314 || !safe_from_p (x, ce->value, 0))
6318 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK)
6319 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
6324 /* The only case we look at here is the DECL_INITIAL inside a
6326 return (TREE_CODE (exp) != DECL_EXPR
6327 || TREE_CODE (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)) != VAR_DECL
6328 || !DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp))
6329 || safe_from_p (x, DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)), 0));
6332 case tcc_comparison:
6333 if (!safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
6338 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
6340 case tcc_expression:
6343 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
6344 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
6345 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
6346 expression recursively. */
6348 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6351 /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict.
6352 Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */
6353 if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
6354 || TREE_STATIC (exp)
6355 || safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))
6358 /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking
6359 the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is
6361 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6364 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp)
6365 || !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (exp)))
6368 exp_rtl = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0);
6372 case MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF:
6373 case ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF:
6376 && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x),
6377 get_alias_set (exp)))
6382 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
6384 if ((REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6389 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
6390 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR:
6391 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
6395 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
6401 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
6405 nops = TREE_OPERAND_LENGTH (exp);
6406 for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
6407 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0
6408 && ! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, i), 0))
6414 /* Should never get a type here. */
6417 case tcc_gimple_stmt:
6421 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
6425 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == SUBREG)
6427 exp_rtl = SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl);
6429 && REGNO (exp_rtl) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6433 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
6434 are memory and they conflict. */
6435 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x, exp_rtl)
6436 || (MEM_P (x) && MEM_P (exp_rtl)
6437 && true_dependence (exp_rtl, VOIDmode, x,
6438 rtx_addr_varies_p)));
6441 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
6446 /* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of.
6447 This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */
6449 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6450 highest_pow2_factor (tree exp)
6452 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c0, c1;
6454 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6457 /* We can find the lowest bit that's a one. If the low
6458 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT bits are zero, return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT.
6459 We need to handle this case since we can find it in a COND_EXPR,
6460 a MIN_EXPR, or a MAX_EXPR. If the constant overflows, we have an
6461 erroneous program, so return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT to avoid any
6463 if (TREE_OVERFLOW (exp))
6464 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT;
6467 /* Note: tree_low_cst is intentionally not used here,
6468 we don't care about the upper bits. */
6469 c0 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp);
6471 return c0 ? c0 : BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT;
6475 case PLUS_EXPR: case MINUS_EXPR: case MIN_EXPR: case MAX_EXPR:
6476 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6477 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6478 return MIN (c0, c1);
6481 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6482 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6485 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR: case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR: case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
6487 if (integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
6488 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
6490 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6491 c1 = tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1);
6492 return MAX (1, c0 / c1);
6496 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR: case NOP_EXPR: case CONVERT_EXPR:
6498 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6501 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6504 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6505 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
6506 return MIN (c0, c1);
6515 /* Similar, except that the alignment requirements of TARGET are
6516 taken into account. Assume it is at least as aligned as its
6517 type, unless it is a COMPONENT_REF in which case the layout of
6518 the structure gives the alignment. */
6520 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6521 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (tree target, tree exp)
6523 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT target_align, factor;
6525 factor = highest_pow2_factor (exp);
6526 if (TREE_CODE (target) == COMPONENT_REF)
6527 target_align = DECL_ALIGN_UNIT (TREE_OPERAND (target, 1));
6529 target_align = TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (target));
6530 return MAX (factor, target_align);
6533 /* Return &VAR expression for emulated thread local VAR. */
6536 emutls_var_address (tree var)
6538 tree emuvar = emutls_decl (var);
6539 tree fn = built_in_decls [BUILT_IN_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS];
6540 tree arg = build_fold_addr_expr_with_type (emuvar, ptr_type_node);
6541 tree arglist = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE, arg);
6542 tree call = build_function_call_expr (fn, arglist);
6543 return fold_convert (build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (var)), call);
6546 /* Expands variable VAR. */
6549 expand_var (tree var)
6551 if (DECL_EXTERNAL (var))
6554 if (TREE_STATIC (var))
6555 /* If this is an inlined copy of a static local variable,
6556 look up the original decl. */
6557 var = DECL_ORIGIN (var);
6559 if (TREE_STATIC (var)
6560 ? !TREE_ASM_WRITTEN (var)
6561 : !DECL_RTL_SET_P (var))
6563 if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && DECL_HAS_VALUE_EXPR_P (var))
6564 /* Should be ignored. */;
6565 else if (lang_hooks.expand_decl (var))
6567 else if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && !TREE_STATIC (var))
6569 else if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && TREE_STATIC (var))
6570 rest_of_decl_compilation (var, 0, 0);
6572 /* No expansion needed. */
6573 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (var) == TYPE_DECL
6574 || TREE_CODE (var) == CONST_DECL
6575 || TREE_CODE (var) == FUNCTION_DECL
6576 || TREE_CODE (var) == LABEL_DECL);
6580 /* Subroutine of expand_expr. Expand the two operands of a binary
6581 expression EXP0 and EXP1 placing the results in OP0 and OP1.
6582 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. The
6583 MODIFIER argument is as documented by expand_expr. */
6586 expand_operands (tree exp0, tree exp1, rtx target, rtx *op0, rtx *op1,
6587 enum expand_modifier modifier)
6589 if (! safe_from_p (target, exp1, 1))
6591 if (operand_equal_p (exp0, exp1, 0))
6593 *op0 = expand_expr (exp0, target, VOIDmode, modifier);
6594 *op1 = copy_rtx (*op0);
6598 /* If we need to preserve evaluation order, copy exp0 into its own
6599 temporary variable so that it can't be clobbered by exp1. */
6600 if (flag_evaluation_order && TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp1))
6601 exp0 = save_expr (exp0);
6602 *op0 = expand_expr (exp0, target, VOIDmode, modifier);
6603 *op1 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
6608 /* Return a MEM that contains constant EXP. DEFER is as for
6609 output_constant_def and MODIFIER is as for expand_expr. */
6612 expand_expr_constant (tree exp, int defer, enum expand_modifier modifier)
6616 mem = output_constant_def (exp, defer);
6617 if (modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
6618 mem = use_anchored_address (mem);
6622 /* A subroutine of expand_expr_addr_expr. Evaluate the address of EXP.
6623 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
6626 expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6627 enum expand_modifier modifier)
6629 rtx result, subtarget;
6631 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
6632 int volatilep, unsignedp;
6633 enum machine_mode mode1;
6635 /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the top level,
6636 we have to use output_constant_def since we can't call force_const_mem
6638 /* ??? This should be considered a front-end bug. We should not be
6639 generating ADDR_EXPR of something that isn't an LVALUE. The only
6640 exception here is STRING_CST. */
6641 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR
6642 || CONSTANT_CLASS_P (exp))
6643 return XEXP (expand_expr_constant (exp, 0, modifier), 0);
6645 /* Everything must be something allowed by is_gimple_addressable. */
6646 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6649 /* This case will happen via recursion for &a->b. */
6650 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
6653 /* Recurse and make the output_constant_def clause above handle this. */
6654 return expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target,
6658 /* The real part of the complex number is always first, therefore
6659 the address is the same as the address of the parent object. */
6662 inner = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6666 /* The imaginary part of the complex number is always second.
6667 The expression is therefore always offset by the size of the
6670 bitpos = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
6671 inner = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6675 /* TLS emulation hook - replace __thread VAR's &VAR with
6676 __emutls_get_address (&_emutls.VAR). */
6677 if (! targetm.have_tls
6678 && TREE_CODE (exp) == VAR_DECL
6679 && DECL_THREAD_LOCAL_P (exp))
6681 exp = emutls_var_address (exp);
6682 return expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
6687 /* If the object is a DECL, then expand it for its rtl. Don't bypass
6688 expand_expr, as that can have various side effects; LABEL_DECLs for
6689 example, may not have their DECL_RTL set yet. Assume language
6690 specific tree nodes can be expanded in some interesting way. */
6692 || TREE_CODE (exp) >= LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE)
6694 result = expand_expr (exp, target, tmode,
6695 modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6696 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS);
6698 /* If the DECL isn't in memory, then the DECL wasn't properly
6699 marked TREE_ADDRESSABLE, which will be either a front-end
6700 or a tree optimizer bug. */
6701 gcc_assert (MEM_P (result));
6702 result = XEXP (result, 0);
6704 /* ??? Is this needed anymore? */
6705 if (DECL_P (exp) && !TREE_USED (exp) == 0)
6707 assemble_external (exp);
6708 TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
6711 if (modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6712 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
6713 result = force_operand (result, target);
6717 /* Pass FALSE as the last argument to get_inner_reference although
6718 we are expanding to RTL. The rationale is that we know how to
6719 handle "aligning nodes" here: we can just bypass them because
6720 they won't change the final object whose address will be returned
6721 (they actually exist only for that purpose). */
6722 inner = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset,
6723 &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep, false);
6727 /* We must have made progress. */
6728 gcc_assert (inner != exp);
6730 subtarget = offset || bitpos ? NULL_RTX : target;
6731 result = expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (inner, subtarget, tmode, modifier);
6737 if (modifier != EXPAND_NORMAL)
6738 result = force_operand (result, NULL);
6739 tmp = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, tmode,
6740 modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6741 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_NORMAL);
6743 result = convert_memory_address (tmode, result);
6744 tmp = convert_memory_address (tmode, tmp);
6746 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
6747 result = gen_rtx_PLUS (tmode, result, tmp);
6750 subtarget = bitpos ? NULL_RTX : target;
6751 result = expand_simple_binop (tmode, PLUS, result, tmp, subtarget,
6752 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6758 /* Someone beforehand should have rejected taking the address
6759 of such an object. */
6760 gcc_assert ((bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT) == 0);
6762 result = plus_constant (result, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
6763 if (modifier < EXPAND_SUM)
6764 result = force_operand (result, target);
6770 /* A subroutine of expand_expr. Evaluate EXP, which is an ADDR_EXPR.
6771 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
6774 expand_expr_addr_expr (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6775 enum expand_modifier modifier)
6777 enum machine_mode rmode;
6780 /* Target mode of VOIDmode says "whatever's natural". */
6781 if (tmode == VOIDmode)
6782 tmode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
6784 /* We can get called with some Weird Things if the user does silliness
6785 like "(short) &a". In that case, convert_memory_address won't do
6786 the right thing, so ignore the given target mode. */
6787 if (tmode != Pmode && tmode != ptr_mode)
6790 result = expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target,
6793 /* Despite expand_expr claims concerning ignoring TMODE when not
6794 strictly convenient, stuff breaks if we don't honor it. Note
6795 that combined with the above, we only do this for pointer modes. */
6796 rmode = GET_MODE (result);
6797 if (rmode == VOIDmode)
6800 result = convert_memory_address (tmode, result);
6806 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
6807 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
6808 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
6810 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
6811 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
6812 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
6814 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
6816 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
6817 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
6818 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
6819 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
6820 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
6822 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
6823 probably will not be used.
6825 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
6826 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
6827 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
6828 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
6829 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
6830 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
6832 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
6833 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
6834 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
6835 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
6837 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
6838 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
6839 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
6841 EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for
6842 a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet
6843 marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We
6844 don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result;
6845 Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to
6846 emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM.
6848 If EXP is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL was a MEM with an invalid
6849 address, and ALT_RTL is non-NULL, then *ALT_RTL is set to the
6850 DECL_RTL of the VAR_DECL. *ALT_RTL is also set if EXP is a
6851 COMPOUND_EXPR whose second argument is such a VAR_DECL, and so on
6854 static rtx expand_expr_real_1 (tree, rtx, enum machine_mode,
6855 enum expand_modifier, rtx *);
6858 expand_expr_real (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6859 enum expand_modifier modifier, rtx *alt_rtl)
6862 rtx ret, last = NULL;
6864 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
6865 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK
6866 || (!GIMPLE_TUPLE_P (exp) && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ERROR_MARK))
6868 ret = CONST0_RTX (tmode);
6869 return ret ? ret : const0_rtx;
6872 if (flag_non_call_exceptions)
6874 rn = lookup_stmt_eh_region (exp);
6875 /* If rn < 0, then either (1) tree-ssa not used or (2) doesn't throw. */
6877 last = get_last_insn ();
6880 /* If this is an expression of some kind and it has an associated line
6881 number, then emit the line number before expanding the expression.
6883 We need to save and restore the file and line information so that
6884 errors discovered during expansion are emitted with the right
6885 information. It would be better of the diagnostic routines
6886 used the file/line information embedded in the tree nodes rather
6888 if (cfun && EXPR_HAS_LOCATION (exp))
6890 location_t saved_location = input_location;
6891 input_location = EXPR_LOCATION (exp);
6892 set_curr_insn_source_location (input_location);
6894 /* Record where the insns produced belong. */
6895 set_curr_insn_block (TREE_BLOCK (exp));
6897 ret = expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl);
6899 input_location = saved_location;
6903 ret = expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl);
6906 /* If using non-call exceptions, mark all insns that may trap.
6907 expand_call() will mark CALL_INSNs before we get to this code,
6908 but it doesn't handle libcalls, and these may trap. */
6912 for (insn = next_real_insn (last); insn;
6913 insn = next_real_insn (insn))
6915 if (! find_reg_note (insn, REG_EH_REGION, NULL_RTX)
6916 /* If we want exceptions for non-call insns, any
6917 may_trap_p instruction may throw. */
6918 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) != CLOBBER
6919 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) != USE
6920 && (CALL_P (insn) || may_trap_p (PATTERN (insn))))
6922 REG_NOTES (insn) = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_EH_REGION, GEN_INT (rn),
6932 expand_expr_real_1 (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6933 enum expand_modifier modifier, rtx *alt_rtl)
6935 rtx op0, op1, op2, temp, decl_rtl;
6938 enum machine_mode mode;
6939 enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
6941 rtx subtarget, original_target;
6943 tree context, subexp0, subexp1;
6944 bool reduce_bit_field = false;
6945 #define REDUCE_BIT_FIELD(expr) (reduce_bit_field && !ignore \
6946 ? reduce_to_bit_field_precision ((expr), \
6951 if (GIMPLE_STMT_P (exp))
6953 type = void_type_node;
6959 type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
6960 mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
6961 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (type);
6963 if (lang_hooks.reduce_bit_field_operations
6964 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
6965 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > TYPE_PRECISION (type))
6967 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
6968 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
6969 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
6970 reduce_bit_field = true;
6971 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
6975 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6976 subtarget = get_subtarget (target);
6977 original_target = target;
6978 ignore = (target == const0_rtx
6979 || ((code == NON_LVALUE_EXPR || code == NOP_EXPR
6980 || code == CONVERT_EXPR || code == COND_EXPR
6981 || code == VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR)
6982 && TREE_CODE (type) == VOID_TYPE));
6984 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
6985 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
6986 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
6987 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
6988 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
6992 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp))
6995 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
6996 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
6997 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp)
6998 && TREE_CODE (exp) != FUNCTION_DECL
6999 && mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
7000 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
7002 temp = expand_expr (exp, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
7004 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
7008 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_unary
7009 || code == COMPONENT_REF || code == INDIRECT_REF)
7010 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
7013 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_binary
7014 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_comparison
7015 || code == ARRAY_REF || code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF)
7017 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7018 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7021 else if (code == BIT_FIELD_REF)
7023 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7024 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7025 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7037 tree function = decl_function_context (exp);
7039 temp = label_rtx (exp);
7040 temp = gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, temp);
7042 if (function != current_function_decl
7044 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (temp) = 1;
7046 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, temp);
7051 return expand_expr_real_1 (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp), target, tmode, modifier,
7056 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
7057 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
7058 if (DECL_SIZE (exp) == 0
7059 && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
7060 && (TREE_STATIC (exp) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp)))
7061 layout_decl (exp, 0);
7063 /* TLS emulation hook - replace __thread vars with
7064 *__emutls_get_address (&_emutls.var). */
7065 if (! targetm.have_tls
7066 && TREE_CODE (exp) == VAR_DECL
7067 && DECL_THREAD_LOCAL_P (exp))
7069 exp = build_fold_indirect_ref (emutls_var_address (exp));
7070 return expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, NULL);
7073 /* ... fall through ... */
7077 decl_rtl = DECL_RTL (exp);
7078 gcc_assert (decl_rtl);
7079 decl_rtl = copy_rtx (decl_rtl);
7081 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
7082 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
7084 if (! TREE_USED (exp))
7086 assemble_external (exp);
7087 TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
7090 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
7093 /* Variables inherited from containing functions should have
7094 been lowered by this point. */
7095 context = decl_function_context (exp);
7096 gcc_assert (!context
7097 || context == current_function_decl
7098 || TREE_STATIC (exp)
7099 /* ??? C++ creates functions that are not TREE_STATIC. */
7100 || TREE_CODE (exp) == FUNCTION_DECL);
7102 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
7103 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
7106 if (MEM_P (decl_rtl) && REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)))
7107 temp = validize_mem (decl_rtl);
7109 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and either
7110 the address is not valid or it is not a register and -fforce-addr
7111 is specified, get the address into a register. */
7113 else if (MEM_P (decl_rtl) && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7116 *alt_rtl = decl_rtl;
7117 decl_rtl = use_anchored_address (decl_rtl);
7118 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7119 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
7120 && (!memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp), XEXP (decl_rtl, 0))
7121 || (flag_force_addr && !REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)))))
7122 temp = replace_equiv_address (decl_rtl,
7123 copy_rtx (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)));
7126 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
7127 if the address is a register. */
7130 if (MEM_P (temp) && REG_P (XEXP (temp, 0)))
7131 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp));
7136 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl, it
7137 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
7138 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
7140 if (REG_P (decl_rtl)
7141 && GET_MODE (decl_rtl) != DECL_MODE (exp))
7143 enum machine_mode pmode;
7145 /* Get the signedness used for this variable. Ensure we get the
7146 same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
7147 pmode = promote_mode (type, DECL_MODE (exp), &unsignedp,
7148 (TREE_CODE (exp) == RESULT_DECL
7149 || TREE_CODE (exp) == PARM_DECL) ? 1 : 0);
7150 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (decl_rtl) == pmode);
7152 temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, decl_rtl);
7153 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1;
7154 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp, unsignedp);
7161 temp = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp),
7162 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp), mode);
7168 tree tmp = NULL_TREE;
7169 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
7170 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)
7171 return const_vector_from_tree (exp);
7172 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
7174 tree type_for_mode = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode (mode, 1);
7176 tmp = fold_unary (VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR, type_for_mode, exp);
7179 tmp = build_constructor_from_list (type,
7180 TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp));
7181 return expand_expr (tmp, ignore ? const0_rtx : target,
7186 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, VOIDmode, modifier);
7189 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
7190 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
7192 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
7193 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
7194 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
7195 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
7196 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
7198 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
7199 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp),
7200 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
7203 /* Handle evaluating a complex constant in a CONCAT target. */
7204 if (original_target && GET_CODE (original_target) == CONCAT)
7206 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
7209 rtarg = XEXP (original_target, 0);
7210 itarg = XEXP (original_target, 1);
7212 /* Move the real and imaginary parts separately. */
7213 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_REALPART (exp), rtarg, mode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
7214 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_IMAGPART (exp), itarg, mode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
7217 emit_move_insn (rtarg, op0);
7219 emit_move_insn (itarg, op1);
7221 return original_target;
7224 /* ... fall through ... */
7227 temp = expand_expr_constant (exp, 1, modifier);
7229 /* temp contains a constant address.
7230 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
7231 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
7232 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7233 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7234 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
7235 && (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (temp, 0))
7236 || flag_force_addr))
7237 return replace_equiv_address (temp,
7238 copy_rtx (XEXP (temp, 0)));
7243 tree val = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7244 rtx ret = expand_expr_real_1 (val, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl);
7246 if (!SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp))
7248 /* We can indeed still hit this case, typically via builtin
7249 expanders calling save_expr immediately before expanding
7250 something. Assume this means that we only have to deal
7251 with non-BLKmode values. */
7252 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (ret) != BLKmode);
7254 val = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL, TREE_TYPE (exp));
7255 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (val) = 1;
7256 DECL_IGNORED_P (val) = 1;
7257 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = val;
7258 SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp) = 1;
7260 if (!CONSTANT_P (ret))
7261 ret = copy_to_reg (ret);
7262 SET_DECL_RTL (val, ret);
7269 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == LABEL_DECL)
7270 expand_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7272 expand_computed_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7276 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
7280 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
7283 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, value)
7284 expand_expr (value, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
7289 /* Try to avoid creating a temporary at all. This is possible
7290 if all of the initializer is zero.
7291 FIXME: try to handle all [0..255] initializers we can handle
7293 else if (TREE_STATIC (exp)
7294 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)
7295 && target != 0 && mode == BLKmode
7296 && all_zeros_p (exp))
7298 clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
7302 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
7303 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
7304 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
7305 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
7306 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
7307 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
7308 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well.
7310 FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal.
7311 Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure
7312 they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers
7313 are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays.
7315 else if ((TREE_STATIC (exp)
7316 && ((mode == BLKmode
7317 && ! (target != 0 && safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)))
7318 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)
7319 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1)
7320 && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
7321 (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1),
7323 && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp))))
7324 || ((modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7325 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
7326 && TREE_CONSTANT (exp)))
7328 rtx constructor = expand_expr_constant (exp, 1, modifier);
7330 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7331 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7332 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM)
7333 constructor = validize_mem (constructor);
7339 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
7340 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
7341 if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)
7342 || GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL
7343 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7345 = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
7347 | (TREE_READONLY (exp)
7348 * TYPE_QUAL_CONST))),
7349 0, TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp), 1);
7351 store_constructor (exp, target, 0, int_expr_size (exp));
7355 case MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF:
7356 case ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF:
7359 tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7361 if (modifier != EXPAND_WRITE)
7365 t = fold_read_from_constant_string (exp);
7367 return expand_expr (t, target, tmode, modifier);
7370 op0 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
7371 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7373 if (code == ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF)
7375 int align = TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (type);
7376 op0 = gen_rtx_AND (Pmode, op0, GEN_INT (-align));
7377 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7380 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0);
7382 set_mem_attributes (temp, exp, 0);
7384 /* Resolve the misalignment now, so that we don't have to remember
7385 to resolve it later. Of course, this only works for reads. */
7386 /* ??? When we get around to supporting writes, we'll have to handle
7387 this in store_expr directly. The vectorizer isn't generating
7388 those yet, however. */
7389 if (code == MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF)
7394 gcc_assert (modifier == EXPAND_NORMAL
7395 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM);
7397 /* The vectorizer should have already checked the mode. */
7398 icode = movmisalign_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code;
7399 gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing);
7401 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
7402 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail. */
7403 reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
7405 /* Nor can the insn generator. */
7406 insn = GEN_FCN (icode) (reg, temp);
7415 case TARGET_MEM_REF:
7417 struct mem_address addr;
7419 get_address_description (exp, &addr);
7420 op0 = addr_for_mem_ref (&addr, true);
7421 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7422 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0);
7423 set_mem_attributes (temp, TMR_ORIGINAL (exp), 0);
7430 tree array = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7431 tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
7433 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
7434 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
7435 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
7436 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
7438 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7439 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7440 && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY)
7442 tree t = fold_read_from_constant_string (exp);
7445 return expand_expr (t, target, tmode, modifier);
7448 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
7449 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
7450 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
7451 that was declared const. */
7453 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7454 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7455 && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY
7456 && TREE_CODE (array) == CONSTRUCTOR
7457 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
7458 && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
7460 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix;
7463 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (array), ix,
7465 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field, index))
7467 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value))
7468 return expand_expr (fold (value), target, tmode, modifier);
7473 else if (optimize >= 1
7474 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7475 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7476 && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY
7477 && TREE_READONLY (array) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
7478 && TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL && DECL_INITIAL (array)
7479 && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != ERROR_MARK
7480 && targetm.binds_local_p (array))
7482 if (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
7484 tree init = DECL_INITIAL (array);
7486 if (TREE_CODE (init) == CONSTRUCTOR)
7488 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix;
7491 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init), ix,
7493 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field, index))
7495 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value))
7496 return expand_expr (fold (value), target, tmode,
7501 else if(TREE_CODE (init) == STRING_CST)
7503 tree index1 = index;
7504 tree low_bound = array_ref_low_bound (exp);
7505 index1 = fold_convert (sizetype, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
7507 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
7509 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
7510 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
7511 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion,l (ARRAY
7512 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
7513 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Opps!) */
7515 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound))
7516 index1 = size_diffop (index1, fold_convert (sizetype,
7519 if (0 > compare_tree_int (index1,
7520 TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init)))
7522 tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init));
7523 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
7525 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
7526 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == 1)
7527 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init)
7528 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index1)],
7535 goto normal_inner_ref;
7538 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
7539 appropriate field if it is present. */
7540 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR)
7542 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
7545 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
7547 if (field == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)
7548 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
7549 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
7550 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
7551 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
7552 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
7553 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
7554 we can't do this optimization. */
7555 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (field)
7556 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (field)) == MODE_INT)
7557 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (field))
7558 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))))
7560 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field)
7561 && modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7563 op0 = expand_expr (value, target, tmode, modifier);
7564 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
7566 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field));
7567 enum machine_mode imode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (field));
7569 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (field)))
7571 op1 = GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1);
7572 op0 = expand_and (imode, op0, op1, target);
7577 = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE,
7578 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode) - bitsize);
7580 op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count,
7582 op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count,
7590 goto normal_inner_ref;
7593 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
7596 enum machine_mode mode1;
7597 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
7600 tree tem = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset,
7601 &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep, true);
7604 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
7605 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
7606 infinitely recurse. */
7607 gcc_assert (tem != exp);
7609 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
7610 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
7611 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
7615 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem)) == UNION_TYPE
7616 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem)))
7618 && modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7619 ? target : NULL_RTX),
7621 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7622 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7623 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7624 ? modifier : EXPAND_NORMAL);
7626 /* If this is a constant, put it into a register if it is a legitimate
7627 constant, OFFSET is 0, and we won't try to extract outside the
7628 register (in case we were passed a partially uninitialized object
7629 or a view_conversion to a larger size). Force the constant to
7630 memory otherwise. */
7631 if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
7633 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem));
7634 if (mode != BLKmode && LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (op0)
7636 && bitpos + bitsize <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
7637 op0 = force_reg (mode, op0);
7639 op0 = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, op0));
7642 /* Otherwise, if this object not in memory and we either have an
7643 offset, a BLKmode result, or a reference outside the object, put it
7644 there. Such cases can occur in Ada if we have unchecked conversion
7645 of an expression from a scalar type to an array or record type or
7646 for an ARRAY_RANGE_REF whose type is BLKmode. */
7647 else if (!MEM_P (op0)
7649 || (bitpos + bitsize > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
7650 || (code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF && mode == BLKmode)))
7652 tree nt = build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem),
7653 (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem))
7654 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST));
7655 rtx memloc = assign_temp (nt, 1, 1, 1);
7657 emit_move_insn (memloc, op0);
7663 rtx offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
7666 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0));
7668 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
7669 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
7670 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
7672 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
7673 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
7676 if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode
7677 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must
7678 not try to call force_reg in that case. */
7679 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) != VOIDmode
7681 && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0
7682 && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0
7683 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1))
7685 op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7689 op0 = offset_address (op0, offset_rtx,
7690 highest_pow2_factor (offset));
7693 /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT,
7694 record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
7695 if (MEM_P (op0) && bitpos == 0 && offset != 0
7696 && is_aligning_offset (offset, tem))
7697 set_mem_align (op0, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT);
7699 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
7700 if (MEM_P (op0) && volatilep && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0))
7702 if (op0 == orig_op0)
7703 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7705 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) = 1;
7708 /* The following code doesn't handle CONCAT.
7709 Assume only bitpos == 0 can be used for CONCAT, due to
7710 one element arrays having the same mode as its element. */
7711 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONCAT)
7713 gcc_assert (bitpos == 0
7714 && bitsize == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)));
7718 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
7719 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
7720 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
7721 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
7722 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
7723 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */
7724 if (mode1 == VOIDmode
7725 || REG_P (op0) || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
7726 || (mode1 != BLKmode && ! direct_load[(int) mode1]
7727 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
7728 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
7729 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7730 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7731 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
7732 fetch it as a bit field. */
7733 || (mode1 != BLKmode
7734 && (((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)
7735 || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) != 0)
7737 && (MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)
7738 || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1) != 0))))
7739 && ((modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7740 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7742 : SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1, MEM_ALIGN (op0))))
7743 || (bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0)))
7744 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
7745 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
7746 we must use bitfield operations. */
7748 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))
7749 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST
7750 && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
7753 enum machine_mode ext_mode = mode;
7755 if (ext_mode == BLKmode
7756 && ! (target != 0 && MEM_P (op0)
7758 && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0))
7759 ext_mode = mode_for_size (bitsize, MODE_INT, 1);
7761 if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
7764 target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
7769 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
7770 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
7771 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0)
7772 && (!target || MEM_P (target))
7773 && !(bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT));
7775 emit_block_move (target,
7776 adjust_address (op0, VOIDmode,
7777 bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT),
7778 GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
7780 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7781 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
7786 op0 = validize_mem (op0);
7788 if (MEM_P (op0) && REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0)))
7789 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0));
7791 op0 = extract_bit_field (op0, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp,
7792 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7793 ? NULL_RTX : target),
7794 ext_mode, ext_mode);
7796 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
7797 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
7798 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
7799 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE && BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7800 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
7801 && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
7802 op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
7803 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
7807 /* If the result type is BLKmode, store the data into a temporary
7808 of the appropriate type, but with the mode corresponding to the
7809 mode for the data we have (op0's mode). It's tempting to make
7810 this a constant type, since we know it's only being stored once,
7811 but that can cause problems if we are taking the address of this
7812 COMPONENT_REF because the MEM of any reference via that address
7813 will have flags corresponding to the type, which will not
7814 necessarily be constant. */
7815 if (mode == BLKmode)
7817 HOST_WIDE_INT size = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (ext_mode);
7820 /* If the reference doesn't use the alias set of its type,
7821 we cannot create the temporary using that type. */
7822 if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (exp))
7824 new = assign_stack_local (ext_mode, size, 0);
7825 set_mem_alias_set (new, get_alias_set (exp));
7828 new = assign_stack_temp_for_type (ext_mode, size, 0, type);
7830 emit_move_insn (new, op0);
7831 op0 = copy_rtx (new);
7832 PUT_MODE (op0, BLKmode);
7833 set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 1);
7839 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
7841 if (mode == BLKmode)
7844 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
7845 if (modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7846 || modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7847 op0 = adjust_address_nv (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7849 op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7851 if (op0 == orig_op0)
7852 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7854 set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 0);
7855 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0)))
7856 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0));
7858 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) |= volatilep;
7859 if (mode == mode1 || mode1 == BLKmode || mode1 == tmode
7860 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7861 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7863 else if (target == 0)
7864 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
7866 convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
7871 return expand_expr (OBJ_TYPE_REF_EXPR (exp), target, tmode, modifier);
7874 /* Check for a built-in function. */
7875 if (TREE_CODE (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp)) == ADDR_EXPR
7876 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0))
7878 && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0)))
7880 if (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0))
7881 == BUILT_IN_FRONTEND)
7882 return lang_hooks.expand_expr (exp, original_target,
7886 return expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, tmode, ignore);
7889 return expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
7891 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
7894 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) == error_mark_node)
7897 if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
7899 tree valtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7901 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing
7902 anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */
7903 if (mode == BLKmode && TYPE_MODE (valtype) == BLKmode)
7905 rtx result = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode,
7908 result = copy_rtx (result);
7909 set_mem_attributes (result, exp, 0);
7915 if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode)
7916 target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type));
7918 target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
7922 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
7923 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7924 adjust_address (target, TYPE_MODE (valtype), 0),
7925 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM,
7930 gcc_assert (REG_P (target));
7932 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
7933 store_field (target,
7934 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
7935 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
7937 (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)),
7938 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7942 /* Return the entire union. */
7946 if (mode == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
7948 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode,
7951 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
7952 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
7953 have to do the proper extension. */
7954 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != unsignedp
7955 && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
7956 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0) = 0;
7958 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0);
7961 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode,
7962 modifier == EXPAND_SUM ? EXPAND_NORMAL : modifier);
7963 if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
7966 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
7967 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
7969 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7970 enum machine_mode inner_mode = TYPE_MODE (inner_type);
7972 if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7973 op0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, op0, inner_mode,
7974 subreg_lowpart_offset (mode,
7977 op0= convert_modes (mode, inner_mode, op0,
7978 TYPE_UNSIGNED (inner_type));
7981 else if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7982 op0 = gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND, mode, op0);
7984 else if (target == 0)
7985 op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0,
7986 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
7987 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
7990 convert_move (target, op0,
7991 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
7995 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0);
7997 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
7998 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode, modifier);
8000 /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done. */
8001 if (TYPE_MODE (type) == GET_MODE (op0))
8003 /* If neither mode is BLKmode, and both modes are the same size
8004 then we can use gen_lowpart. */
8005 else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (op0) != BLKmode
8006 && GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))
8007 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
8009 if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
8010 op0 = force_reg (GET_MODE (op0), op0);
8011 op0 = gen_lowpart (TYPE_MODE (type), op0);
8013 /* If both modes are integral, then we can convert from one to the
8015 else if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
8016 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (type)))
8017 op0 = convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (type), GET_MODE (op0), op0,
8018 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8019 /* As a last resort, spill op0 to memory, and reload it in a
8021 else if (!MEM_P (op0))
8023 /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we
8024 are going to be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call
8025 force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool
8026 constants to change mode. */
8027 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8029 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp));
8031 if (target == 0 || GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type))
8033 = assign_stack_temp_for_type
8034 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type),
8035 GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type)), 0, inner_type);
8037 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
8041 /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is such
8042 that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is.
8043 Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode
8047 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
8049 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type))
8050 set_mem_align (op0, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0), TYPE_ALIGN (type)));
8051 else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && STRICT_ALIGNMENT
8052 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (TYPE_MODE (type)))
8054 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8055 HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size
8056 = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type),
8057 (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)));
8058 rtx new = assign_stack_temp_for_type (TYPE_MODE (type),
8059 temp_size, 0, type);
8060 rtx new_with_op0_mode = adjust_address (new, GET_MODE (op0), 0);
8062 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp));
8064 if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode)
8065 emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode, op0,
8066 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))),
8067 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8068 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
8070 emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode, op0);
8075 op0 = adjust_address (op0, TYPE_MODE (type), 0);
8080 case POINTER_PLUS_EXPR:
8081 /* Even though the sizetype mode and the pointer's mode can be different
8082 expand is able to handle this correctly and get the correct result out
8083 of the PLUS_EXPR code. */
8086 /* Check if this is a case for multiplication and addition. */
8087 if (TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8088 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == MULT_EXPR)
8090 tree subsubexp0, subsubexp1;
8091 enum tree_code code0, code1;
8093 subexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8094 subsubexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0);
8095 subsubexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 1);
8096 code0 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp0);
8097 code1 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp1);
8098 if (code0 == NOP_EXPR && code1 == NOP_EXPR
8099 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8100 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (subsubexp0)))
8101 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8102 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0))))
8103 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8104 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0)))))
8106 tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0));
8107 enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type);
8108 bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type);
8109 this_optab = zextend_p ? umadd_widen_optab : smadd_widen_optab;
8110 if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode)
8111 && (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code
8112 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
8114 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0),
8115 TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0),
8116 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8117 op2 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget,
8118 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8119 temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2,
8122 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8127 /* If we are adding a constant, a VAR_DECL that is sp, fp, or ap, and
8128 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
8129 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
8130 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
8131 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
8133 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
8134 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
8135 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
8136 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
8138 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
8139 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8140 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == VAR_DECL
8141 && (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx
8142 || DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx
8143 || DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx))
8145 tree t = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8147 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
8148 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0) = t;
8151 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
8152 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
8153 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
8154 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
8155 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
8158 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
8159 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8160 || (mode == ptr_mode && (unsignedp || ! flag_trapv)))
8162 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8164 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
8165 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8166 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
8170 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8172 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8173 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8174 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8175 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8177 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
8179 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
8180 op1 = plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (constant_part));
8181 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8182 op1 = force_operand (op1, target);
8183 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op1);
8186 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8187 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8188 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
8192 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8193 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8194 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_SUM));
8195 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0))
8197 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX,
8198 VOIDmode, modifier);
8199 /* Return a PLUS if modifier says it's OK. */
8200 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM
8201 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8202 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1);
8205 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8206 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8207 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8208 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8210 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
8212 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8213 op0 = plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (constant_part));
8214 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8215 op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
8216 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0);
8220 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8221 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8222 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8224 if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8225 || mode != ptr_mode)
8227 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8228 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8229 if (op0 == const0_rtx)
8231 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
8236 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8237 subtarget, &op0, &op1, modifier);
8238 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1));
8241 /* Check if this is a case for multiplication and subtraction. */
8242 if (TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8243 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == MULT_EXPR)
8245 tree subsubexp0, subsubexp1;
8246 enum tree_code code0, code1;
8248 subexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8249 subsubexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0);
8250 subsubexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 1);
8251 code0 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp0);
8252 code1 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp1);
8253 if (code0 == NOP_EXPR && code1 == NOP_EXPR
8254 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8255 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (subsubexp0)))
8256 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8257 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0))))
8258 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8259 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0)))))
8261 tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0));
8262 enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type);
8263 bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type);
8264 this_optab = zextend_p ? umsub_widen_optab : smsub_widen_optab;
8265 if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode)
8266 && (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code
8267 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
8269 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0),
8270 TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0),
8271 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8272 op2 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8273 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8274 temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2,
8277 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8282 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
8283 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
8285 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
8286 for the sake of an initializer. */
8287 if ((modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8288 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8289 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
8291 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8292 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, modifier);
8294 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
8295 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
8296 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8297 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1)));
8299 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MINUS (mode, op0, op1));
8302 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8303 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8304 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8306 if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8307 || mode != ptr_mode)
8310 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8311 subtarget, &op0, &op1, modifier);
8313 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
8314 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8316 op1 = negate_rtx (mode, op1);
8317 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1));
8323 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8324 Thus the following special case checks need only
8325 check the second operand. */
8326 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST)
8328 tree t1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8329 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8330 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = t1;
8333 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
8334 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
8336 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM && mode == ptr_mode
8337 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
8339 tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8341 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8345 op0 = force_operand (op0, NULL_RTX);
8347 op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op0);
8349 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MULT (mode, op0,
8350 gen_int_mode (tree_low_cst (exp1, 0),
8351 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1)))));
8354 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8357 /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended
8358 from a narrower type. If this machine supports multiplying
8359 in that narrower type with a result in the desired type,
8360 do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion. */
8362 subexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8363 subexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8364 /* First, check if we have a multiplication of one signed and one
8365 unsigned operand. */
8366 if (TREE_CODE (subexp0) == NOP_EXPR
8367 && TREE_CODE (subexp1) == NOP_EXPR
8368 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8369 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))
8370 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
8371 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))
8372 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0))))
8373 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))
8374 != TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0)))))
8376 enum machine_mode innermode
8377 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)));
8378 this_optab = usmul_widen_optab;
8379 if (mode == GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode))
8381 if (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
8383 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0))))
8384 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0),
8385 TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0),
8386 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
8388 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0),
8389 TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0),
8390 NULL_RTX, &op1, &op0, 0);
8396 /* Check for a multiplication with matching signedness. */
8397 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == NOP_EXPR
8398 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8399 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8400 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
8401 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8402 && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8403 TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8404 /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do. */
8405 && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
8406 > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8407 || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) < 0))
8409 (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
8410 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE
8411 (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
8412 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE
8414 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))))
8415 /* If both operands are extended, they must either both
8416 be zero-extended or both be sign-extended. */
8417 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
8418 (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
8419 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
8421 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))))))
8423 tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0));
8424 enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type);
8425 bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type);
8426 optab other_optab = zextend_p ? smul_widen_optab : umul_widen_optab;
8427 this_optab = zextend_p ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab;
8429 if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode))
8431 if (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
8433 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
8434 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8435 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8436 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8438 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8439 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0),
8440 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8443 else if (other_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing
8444 && innermode == word_mode)
8447 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0));
8448 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
8449 op1 = convert_modes (innermode, mode,
8450 expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
8453 op1 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0));
8454 temp = expand_binop (mode, other_optab, op0, op1, target,
8455 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8456 hipart = gen_highpart (innermode, temp);
8457 htem = expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode, hipart,
8461 emit_move_insn (hipart, htem);
8462 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8466 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8467 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8468 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp));
8470 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR:
8471 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
8473 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR:
8474 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR:
8475 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8477 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
8478 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
8479 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
8480 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8481 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8482 return expand_divmod (0, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8487 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR:
8488 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR:
8490 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR:
8491 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8493 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8494 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8495 return expand_divmod (1, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8497 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
8498 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8499 if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8500 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8501 expand_fix (target, op0, unsignedp);
8505 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8506 if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8507 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8508 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
8509 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
8510 if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
8511 op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))),
8513 expand_float (target, op0,
8514 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8518 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8519 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8520 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8522 temp = expand_unop (mode,
8523 optab_for_tree_code (NEGATE_EXPR, type),
8526 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8529 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8530 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8531 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8534 /* ABS_EXPR is not valid for complex arguments. */
8535 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
8536 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT);
8538 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
8539 risk generating incorrect code below. */
8540 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type))
8543 return expand_abs (mode, op0, target, unsignedp,
8544 safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1));
8548 target = original_target;
8550 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8551 || (MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
8552 || GET_MODE (target) != mode
8554 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
8555 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8556 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8557 target, &op0, &op1, 0);
8559 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
8560 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
8562 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
8563 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
8568 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
8571 if (! REG_P (target))
8572 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8574 /* If op1 was placed in target, swap op0 and op1. */
8575 if (target != op0 && target == op1)
8582 /* We generate better code and avoid problems with op1 mentioning
8583 target by forcing op1 into a pseudo if it isn't a constant. */
8584 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
8585 op1 = force_reg (mode, op1);
8588 enum rtx_code comparison_code;
8591 if (code == MAX_EXPR)
8592 comparison_code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
8594 comparison_code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
8596 /* Canonicalize to comparisons against 0. */
8597 if (op1 == const1_rtx)
8599 /* Converting (a >= 1 ? a : 1) into (a > 0 ? a : 1)
8600 or (a != 0 ? a : 1) for unsigned.
8601 For MIN we are safe converting (a <= 1 ? a : 1)
8602 into (a <= 0 ? a : 1) */
8603 cmpop1 = const0_rtx;
8604 if (code == MAX_EXPR)
8605 comparison_code = unsignedp ? NE : GT;
8607 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && !unsignedp)
8609 /* Converting (a >= -1 ? a : -1) into (a >= 0 ? a : -1)
8610 and (a <= -1 ? a : -1) into (a < 0 ? a : -1) */
8611 cmpop1 = const0_rtx;
8612 if (code == MIN_EXPR)
8613 comparison_code = LT;
8615 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8616 /* Use a conditional move if possible. */
8617 if (can_conditionally_move_p (mode))
8621 /* ??? Same problem as in expmed.c: emit_conditional_move
8622 forces a stack adjustment via compare_from_rtx, and we
8623 lose the stack adjustment if the sequence we are about
8624 to create is discarded. */
8625 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8629 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
8630 insn = emit_conditional_move (target, comparison_code,
8635 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
8639 rtx seq = get_insns ();
8645 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
8651 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
8653 temp = gen_label_rtx ();
8654 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target, cmpop1, comparison_code,
8655 unsignedp, mode, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, temp);
8657 emit_move_insn (target, op1);
8662 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8663 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8664 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8666 temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, target, 1);
8670 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
8671 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
8672 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
8673 but that is probably not worth while. */
8675 /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding. TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two
8676 boolean values when we want in all cases to compute both of them. In
8677 general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by computing both operands
8678 as actual zero-or-1 values and then bitwise anding. In cases where
8679 there cannot be any side effects, better code would be made by
8680 treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR; but the question is
8681 how to recognize those cases. */
8683 case TRUTH_AND_EXPR:
8684 code = BIT_AND_EXPR;
8689 code = BIT_IOR_EXPR;
8693 case TRUTH_XOR_EXPR:
8694 code = BIT_XOR_EXPR;
8702 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8704 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8706 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8707 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8708 return expand_shift (code, mode, op0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target,
8711 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
8712 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
8719 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
8727 temp = do_store_flag (exp,
8728 modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? target : NULL_RTX,
8729 tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode, 0);
8733 /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */
8734 if (code == NE_EXPR && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
8736 && REG_P (original_target)
8737 && (GET_MODE (original_target)
8738 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
8740 temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target,
8741 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8743 /* If temp is constant, we can just compute the result. */
8744 if (GET_CODE (temp) == CONST_INT)
8746 if (INTVAL (temp) != 0)
8747 emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
8749 emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
8754 if (temp != original_target)
8756 enum machine_mode mode1 = GET_MODE (temp);
8757 if (mode1 == VOIDmode)
8758 mode1 = tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode;
8760 temp = copy_to_mode_reg (mode1, temp);
8763 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8764 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (temp, const0_rtx, EQ, NULL_RTX,
8765 GET_MODE (temp), unsignedp, op1);
8766 emit_move_insn (temp, const1_rtx);
8771 /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional store
8772 into a temporary variable. Drop through and handle this
8777 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8778 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)
8779 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
8780 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
8781 || (!optimize && REG_P (target)
8782 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
8783 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
8786 emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
8788 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8789 jumpifnot (exp, op1);
8792 emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
8795 return ignore ? const0_rtx : target;
8797 case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
8798 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8800 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target,
8801 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8802 /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
8803 only with operands that are always zero or one. */
8804 temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx,
8805 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8809 case STATEMENT_LIST:
8811 tree_stmt_iterator iter;
8813 gcc_assert (ignore);
8815 for (iter = tsi_start (exp); !tsi_end_p (iter); tsi_next (&iter))
8816 expand_expr (tsi_stmt (iter), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
8821 /* A COND_EXPR with its type being VOID_TYPE represents a
8822 conditional jump and is handled in
8823 expand_gimple_cond_expr. */
8824 gcc_assert (!VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
8826 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
8827 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
8828 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
8829 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
8831 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type)
8833 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != void_type_node
8834 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != void_type_node);
8836 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
8837 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
8838 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
8841 if (modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8843 && safe_from_p (original_target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)
8844 && GET_MODE (original_target) == mode
8845 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8846 && (! can_conditionally_move_p (mode)
8847 || REG_P (original_target))
8849 && !MEM_P (original_target))
8850 temp = original_target;
8852 temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 0, 1);
8854 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8856 op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
8857 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8858 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8859 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp,
8860 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM,
8863 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1));
8866 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp,
8867 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM,
8875 target = expand_vec_cond_expr (exp, target);
8880 tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8881 tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8882 gcc_assert (ignore);
8883 expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, false);
8887 case GIMPLE_MODIFY_STMT:
8889 tree lhs = GIMPLE_STMT_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8890 tree rhs = GIMPLE_STMT_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8892 gcc_assert (ignore);
8894 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
8895 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
8896 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
8897 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
8899 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
8900 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
8902 if (TREE_CODE (lhs) == COMPONENT_REF
8903 && (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
8904 || TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
8905 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 0) == lhs
8906 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
8907 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs, 1)))
8908 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), 1))))
8910 rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
8911 int value = TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR;
8912 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1),
8915 expand_assignment (lhs, build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (rhs), value),
8916 MOVE_NONTEMPORAL (exp));
8917 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8922 expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, MOVE_NONTEMPORAL (exp));
8927 if (!TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8928 expand_null_return ();
8930 expand_return (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8934 return expand_expr_addr_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
8937 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
8938 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8939 op1 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
8942 target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
8944 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
8945 write_complex_part (target, op0, false);
8946 write_complex_part (target, op1, true);
8951 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8952 return read_complex_part (op0, false);
8955 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8956 return read_complex_part (op0, true);
8959 expand_resx_expr (exp);
8962 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR:
8964 case EH_FILTER_EXPR:
8965 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR:
8966 /* Lowered by tree-eh.c. */
8969 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
8970 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR:
8972 case CASE_LABEL_EXPR:
8978 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR:
8979 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR:
8980 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR:
8981 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR:
8984 case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
8985 case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
8986 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
8989 case CHANGE_DYNAMIC_TYPE_EXPR:
8990 /* This is ignored at the RTL level. The tree level set
8991 DECL_POINTER_ALIAS_SET of any variable to be 0, which is
8992 overkill for the RTL layer but is all that we can
8997 return get_exception_pointer (cfun);
9000 return get_exception_filter (cfun);
9003 /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as
9004 initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */
9012 expand_label (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9016 expand_asm_expr (exp);
9019 case WITH_SIZE_EXPR:
9020 /* WITH_SIZE_EXPR expands to its first argument. The caller should
9021 have pulled out the size to use in whatever context it needed. */
9022 return expand_expr_real (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, tmode,
9025 case REALIGN_LOAD_EXPR:
9027 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9028 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9029 tree oprnd2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
9032 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9033 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9034 op2 = expand_normal (oprnd2);
9035 temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2,
9043 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9044 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9045 tree oprnd2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
9048 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9049 op2 = expand_normal (oprnd2);
9050 target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, op1, op2,
9055 case WIDEN_SUM_EXPR:
9057 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9058 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9060 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9061 target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, op1,
9066 case REDUC_MAX_EXPR:
9067 case REDUC_MIN_EXPR:
9068 case REDUC_PLUS_EXPR:
9070 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9071 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9072 temp = expand_unop (mode, this_optab, op0, target, unsignedp);
9077 case VEC_EXTRACT_EVEN_EXPR:
9078 case VEC_EXTRACT_ODD_EXPR:
9080 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
9081 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9082 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9083 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
9089 case VEC_INTERLEAVE_HIGH_EXPR:
9090 case VEC_INTERLEAVE_LOW_EXPR:
9092 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
9093 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9094 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9095 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
9101 case VEC_LSHIFT_EXPR:
9102 case VEC_RSHIFT_EXPR:
9104 target = expand_vec_shift_expr (exp, target);
9108 case VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR:
9109 case VEC_UNPACK_LO_EXPR:
9111 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9112 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9113 temp = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
9119 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_HI_EXPR:
9120 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_LO_EXPR:
9122 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9123 /* The signedness is determined from input operand. */
9124 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code,
9125 TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
9126 temp = expand_widen_pattern_expr
9127 (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
9128 target, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
9134 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_HI_EXPR:
9135 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_LO_EXPR:
9137 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9138 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9140 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9141 target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, op1, NULL_RTX,
9143 gcc_assert (target);
9147 case VEC_PACK_TRUNC_EXPR:
9148 case VEC_PACK_SAT_EXPR:
9149 case VEC_PACK_FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
9151 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
9156 return lang_hooks.expand_expr (exp, original_target, tmode,
9160 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator. */
9162 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
9163 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
9165 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9167 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
9169 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target,
9170 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
9172 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
9174 #undef REDUCE_BIT_FIELD
9176 /* Subroutine of above: reduce EXP to the precision of TYPE (in the
9177 signedness of TYPE), possibly returning the result in TARGET. */
9179 reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx exp, rtx target, tree type)
9181 HOST_WIDE_INT prec = TYPE_PRECISION (type);
9182 if (target && GET_MODE (target) != GET_MODE (exp))
9184 /* For constant values, reduce using build_int_cst_type. */
9185 if (GET_CODE (exp) == CONST_INT)
9187 HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (exp);
9188 tree t = build_int_cst_type (type, value);
9189 return expand_expr (t, target, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9191 else if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type))
9194 if (prec < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
9195 mask = immed_double_const (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << prec) - 1, 0,
9198 mask = immed_double_const ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) -1,
9199 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
9200 << (prec - HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)) - 1,
9202 return expand_and (GET_MODE (exp), exp, mask, target);
9206 tree count = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE,
9207 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (exp)) - prec);
9208 exp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (exp), exp, count, target, 0);
9209 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (exp), exp, count, target, 0);
9213 /* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that
9214 when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be
9215 aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9218 is_aligning_offset (tree offset, tree exp)
9220 /* Strip off any conversions. */
9221 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9222 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9223 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9224 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9226 /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than
9227 power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9228 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != BIT_AND_EXPR
9229 || !host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1)
9230 || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1),
9231 BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT) <= 0
9232 || !exact_log2 (tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1) + 1) < 0)
9235 /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion.
9236 It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */
9237 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9238 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9239 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9240 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9241 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9243 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != NEGATE_EXPR)
9246 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9247 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9248 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9249 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9250 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9252 /* This must now be the address of EXP. */
9253 return TREE_CODE (offset) == ADDR_EXPR && TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0) == exp;
9256 /* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
9257 if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
9258 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
9259 offset will be `sizetype'. */
9262 string_constant (tree arg, tree *ptr_offset)
9264 tree array, offset, lower_bound;
9267 if (TREE_CODE (arg) == ADDR_EXPR)
9269 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == STRING_CST)
9271 *ptr_offset = size_zero_node;
9272 return TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9274 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == VAR_DECL)
9276 array = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9277 offset = size_zero_node;
9279 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == ARRAY_REF)
9281 array = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0), 0);
9282 offset = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0), 1);
9283 if (TREE_CODE (array) != STRING_CST
9284 && TREE_CODE (array) != VAR_DECL)
9287 /* Check if the array has a nonzero lower bound. */
9288 lower_bound = array_ref_low_bound (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0));
9289 if (!integer_zerop (lower_bound))
9291 /* If the offset and base aren't both constants, return 0. */
9292 if (TREE_CODE (lower_bound) != INTEGER_CST)
9294 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != INTEGER_CST)
9296 /* Adjust offset by the lower bound. */
9297 offset = size_diffop (fold_convert (sizetype, offset),
9298 fold_convert (sizetype, lower_bound));
9304 else if (TREE_CODE (arg) == PLUS_EXPR || TREE_CODE (arg) == POINTER_PLUS_EXPR)
9306 tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9307 tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 1);
9312 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == ADDR_EXPR
9313 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == STRING_CST
9314 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == VAR_DECL))
9316 array = TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
9319 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1) == ADDR_EXPR
9320 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == STRING_CST
9321 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == VAR_DECL))
9323 array = TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
9332 if (TREE_CODE (array) == STRING_CST)
9334 *ptr_offset = fold_convert (sizetype, offset);
9337 else if (TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL)
9341 /* Variables initialized to string literals can be handled too. */
9342 if (DECL_INITIAL (array) == NULL_TREE
9343 || TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != STRING_CST)
9346 /* If they are read-only, non-volatile and bind locally. */
9347 if (! TREE_READONLY (array)
9348 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
9349 || ! targetm.binds_local_p (array))
9352 /* Avoid const char foo[4] = "abcde"; */
9353 if (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array) == NULL_TREE
9354 || TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array)) != INTEGER_CST
9355 || (length = TREE_STRING_LENGTH (DECL_INITIAL (array))) <= 0
9356 || compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array), length) < 0)
9359 /* If variable is bigger than the string literal, OFFSET must be constant
9360 and inside of the bounds of the string literal. */
9361 offset = fold_convert (sizetype, offset);
9362 if (compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array), length) > 0
9363 && (! host_integerp (offset, 1)
9364 || compare_tree_int (offset, length) >= 0))
9367 *ptr_offset = offset;
9368 return DECL_INITIAL (array);
9374 /* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction
9375 and return an rtx for the result. EXP is either a comparison
9376 or a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR whose operand is a comparison.
9378 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
9380 If ONLY_CHEAP is nonzero, only do this if it is likely to be very
9383 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
9384 available on this machine.
9386 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
9387 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
9388 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
9389 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
9390 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
9391 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
9392 set/jump/set sequence. */
9395 do_store_flag (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode mode, int only_cheap)
9398 tree arg0, arg1, type;
9400 enum machine_mode operand_mode;
9404 enum insn_code icode;
9405 rtx subtarget = target;
9408 /* If this is a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR, set a flag indicating we must invert the
9409 result at the end. We can't simply invert the test since it would
9410 have already been inverted if it were valid. This case occurs for
9411 some floating-point comparisons. */
9413 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TRUTH_NOT_EXPR)
9414 invert = 1, exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9416 arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9417 arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9419 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
9420 if (arg0 == error_mark_node || arg1 == error_mark_node)
9423 type = TREE_TYPE (arg0);
9424 operand_mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
9425 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (type);
9427 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
9428 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
9429 if (operand_mode == BLKmode)
9432 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
9433 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
9434 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
9435 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
9436 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == POINTER_TYPE
9437 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
9439 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == POINTER_TYPE
9440 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
9441 == FUNCTION_TYPE))))
9448 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
9449 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
9450 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
9451 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
9452 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
9453 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
9455 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
9464 if (integer_onep (arg1))
9465 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
9467 code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
9470 if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1))
9471 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = LT;
9473 code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
9476 if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1))
9477 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = GE;
9479 code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
9482 if (integer_onep (arg1))
9483 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
9485 code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
9488 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
9517 /* Put a constant second. */
9518 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == REAL_CST || TREE_CODE (arg0) == INTEGER_CST)
9520 tem = arg0; arg0 = arg1; arg1 = tem;
9521 code = swap_condition (code);
9524 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
9525 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
9526 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
9527 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
9528 than an scc insn even if we have it.
9530 The code to make this transformation was moved into fold_single_bit_test,
9531 so we just call into the folder and expand its result. */
9533 if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
9534 && TREE_CODE (arg0) == BIT_AND_EXPR && integer_zerop (arg1)
9535 && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1)))
9537 tree type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode (mode, unsignedp);
9538 return expand_expr (fold_single_bit_test (code == NE ? NE_EXPR : EQ_EXPR,
9540 target, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9543 /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this. Return if not. */
9544 if (! can_compare_p (code, operand_mode, ccp_store_flag))
9547 icode = setcc_gen_code[(int) code];
9549 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
9551 enum machine_mode wmode;
9553 for (wmode = operand_mode;
9554 icode == CODE_FOR_nothing && wmode != VOIDmode;
9555 wmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wmode))
9556 icode = cstore_optab->handlers[(int) wmode].insn_code;
9559 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
9560 || (only_cheap && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].mode != mode))
9562 /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that
9563 can be handled without an scc insn. */
9564 if ((code == LT && integer_zerop (arg1))
9565 || (! only_cheap && code == GE && integer_zerop (arg1)))
9567 else if (! only_cheap && (code == NE || code == EQ)
9568 && TREE_CODE (type) != REAL_TYPE
9569 && ((abs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
9570 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
9571 || (ffs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
9572 != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
9578 if (! get_subtarget (target)
9579 || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode)
9582 expand_operands (arg0, arg1, subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
9585 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
9587 result = emit_store_flag (target, code, op0, op1,
9588 operand_mode, unsignedp, 1);
9593 result = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, result, const1_rtx,
9594 result, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
9598 /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code. */
9600 || reg_mentioned_p (target, op0) || reg_mentioned_p (target, op1))
9601 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
9603 emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx);
9604 label = gen_label_rtx ();
9605 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, operand_mode, NULL_RTX,
9608 emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const1_rtx : const0_rtx);
9615 /* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */
9617 # define HAVE_casesi 0
9618 # define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0)
9619 # define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing
9622 /* If the machine does not have a case insn that compares the bounds,
9623 this means extra overhead for dispatch tables, which raises the
9624 threshold for using them. */
9625 #ifndef CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
9626 #define CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD (HAVE_casesi ? 4 : 5)
9627 #endif /* CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD */
9630 case_values_threshold (void)
9632 return CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD;
9635 /* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful,
9636 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction). */
9638 try_casesi (tree index_type, tree index_expr, tree minval, tree range,
9639 rtx table_label ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx default_label)
9641 enum machine_mode index_mode = SImode;
9642 int index_bits = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode);
9643 rtx op1, op2, index;
9644 enum machine_mode op_mode;
9649 /* Convert the index to SImode. */
9650 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode))
9652 enum machine_mode omode = TYPE_MODE (index_type);
9653 rtx rangertx = expand_normal (range);
9655 /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */
9656 index_expr = build2 (MINUS_EXPR, index_type,
9657 index_expr, minval);
9658 minval = integer_zero_node;
9659 index = expand_normal (index_expr);
9660 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx, index, LTU, NULL_RTX,
9661 omode, 1, default_label);
9662 /* Now we can safely truncate. */
9663 index = convert_to_mode (index_mode, index, 0);
9667 if (TYPE_MODE (index_type) != index_mode)
9669 index_type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_size (index_bits, 0);
9670 index_expr = fold_convert (index_type, index_expr);
9673 index = expand_normal (index_expr);
9676 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9678 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].mode;
9679 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].predicate)
9681 index = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, index);
9683 op1 = expand_normal (minval);
9685 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].mode;
9686 op1 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (minval)),
9687 op1, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (minval)));
9688 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].predicate)
9690 op1 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op1);
9692 op2 = expand_normal (range);
9694 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].mode;
9695 op2 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)),
9696 op2, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range)));
9697 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].predicate)
9699 op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op2);
9701 emit_jump_insn (gen_casesi (index, op1, op2,
9702 table_label, default_label));
9706 /* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */
9707 #ifndef HAVE_tablejump
9708 #define HAVE_tablejump 0
9709 #define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0)
9712 /* Subroutine of the next function.
9714 INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
9715 in the table already subtracted.
9716 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
9717 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
9718 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
9720 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
9721 index value is out of range. */
9724 do_tablejump (rtx index, enum machine_mode mode, rtx range, rtx table_label,
9729 if (INTVAL (range) > cfun->max_jumptable_ents)
9730 cfun->max_jumptable_ents = INTVAL (range);
9732 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
9733 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
9734 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
9735 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
9736 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
9737 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
9738 the maximum value of the range. */
9740 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index, range, GTU, NULL_RTX, mode, 1,
9743 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
9744 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
9746 index = convert_to_mode (Pmode, index, 1);
9748 /* Don't let a MEM slip through, because then INDEX that comes
9749 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
9750 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
9751 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
9752 if (flag_pic && !REG_P (index))
9753 index = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, index);
9756 /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address
9757 it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made
9758 about addresses that contain label-refs,
9759 which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself. */
9760 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
9761 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
9762 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
9763 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
9764 index = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
9765 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode, index,
9766 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE))),
9767 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, table_label));
9768 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
9770 index = PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index);
9773 index = memory_address_noforce (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
9774 temp = gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE);
9775 vector = gen_const_mem (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
9776 convert_move (temp, vector, 0);
9778 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp, table_label));
9780 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
9781 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
9782 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE && ! flag_pic)
9787 try_tablejump (tree index_type, tree index_expr, tree minval, tree range,
9788 rtx table_label, rtx default_label)
9792 if (! HAVE_tablejump)
9795 index_expr = fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, index_type,
9796 fold_convert (index_type, index_expr),
9797 fold_convert (index_type, minval));
9798 index = expand_normal (index_expr);
9799 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9801 do_tablejump (index, TYPE_MODE (index_type),
9802 convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type),
9803 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)),
9804 expand_normal (range),
9805 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range))),
9806 table_label, default_label);
9810 /* Nonzero if the mode is a valid vector mode for this architecture.
9811 This returns nonzero even if there is no hardware support for the
9812 vector mode, but we can emulate with narrower modes. */
9815 vector_mode_valid_p (enum machine_mode mode)
9817 enum mode_class class = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
9818 enum machine_mode innermode;
9820 /* Doh! What's going on? */
9821 if (class != MODE_VECTOR_INT
9822 && class != MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)
9825 /* Hardware support. Woo hoo! */
9826 if (targetm.vector_mode_supported_p (mode))
9829 innermode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
9831 /* We should probably return 1 if requesting V4DI and we have no DI,
9832 but we have V2DI, but this is probably very unlikely. */
9834 /* If we have support for the inner mode, we can safely emulate it.
9835 We may not have V2DI, but me can emulate with a pair of DIs. */
9836 return targetm.scalar_mode_supported_p (innermode);
9839 /* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */
9841 const_vector_from_tree (tree exp)
9846 enum machine_mode inner, mode;
9848 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
9850 if (initializer_zerop (exp))
9851 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
9853 units = GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode);
9854 inner = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
9856 v = rtvec_alloc (units);
9858 link = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp);
9859 for (i = 0; link; link = TREE_CHAIN (link), ++i)
9861 elt = TREE_VALUE (link);
9863 if (TREE_CODE (elt) == REAL_CST)
9864 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt),
9867 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (elt),
9868 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (elt),
9872 /* Initialize remaining elements to 0. */
9873 for (; i < units; ++i)
9874 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST0_RTX (inner);
9876 return gen_rtx_CONST_VECTOR (mode, v);
9878 #include "gt-expr.h"